Nikon Z50 User manual

Nikon Z50 User manual
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page xxii).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
place for future reference.
En
Choose from 2 different manuals.
 For a guide to all aspects of camera operation, read:
The Reference Manual (this manual)
In addition to the material covered in the User’s
Manual supplied with the camera, the Reference
Manual explores applied photography, details the
options available in the camera menus, and covers
such topics as connecting the camera to other devices.
•
•
•
Among the topics covered in the Reference Manual are:
• Advanced shooting options
• The i Menu
• Menu guide
• Wireless connections to computers,
smartphones, and tablets
• Connecting to other devices
• Flash photography using optional
flash units
The Reference Manual can also be viewed online in html format.
nikon online manual Z 50
https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z50/en/
Z 50 Model Name: N1912
ii
•
•
•
 For a guide to basic shooting and playback, read:
The User’s Manual (included)
Master basic camera operations and features.
Outline:
• Table of Contents
• Menu List
• Getting to Know the Camera
• First Steps
• Basic Photography and Playback
• Basic Settings
• Troubleshooting
• Technical Notes
• Index
•
•
•
iii
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
BF-N1 body cap
Camera
EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion
battery with terminal cover
MH-32 battery charger (plug
adapter supplied in countries or
regions where required; shape
depends on country of sale)
AN-DC20 strap (0 30)
DK-30 rubber eyecup
(comes attached to
camera, 0 432)
Warranty
User’s Manual
UC-E21 USB cable (0 387)
Memory cards are sold separately. Purchasers of the lens kit
option should confirm that the package also includes a lens
(manuals for the lens may also be provided).
The Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates,
ViewNX-i and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products
including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
iv
About This Manual
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before
using this product.
A
This icon marks tips, additional information you may find
helpful when using this product.
0
This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages that appear in the camera displays
are shown in bold. Throughout this manual, the display in camera
monitor and viewfinder during shooting is referred to as the “shooting
display”; in most cases, the illustrations show the monitor.
This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred to
throughout this manual as “memory cards”.
Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smart devices”.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0 xxii).
v
Table of Contents
Package Contents ........................................................................ iv
Menu List ................................................................................... xviii
For Your Safety .......................................................................... xxii
Notices........................................................................................ xxvi
Getting to Know the Camera
1
Parts of the Camera ...................................................................... 1
Camera Body ............................................................................................1
The Monitor and Viewfinder...............................................................5
Camera Controls............................................................................ 7
The Viewfinder.........................................................................................7
The Monitor Mode Button...................................................................8
The Mode Dial..........................................................................................9
The Command Dials ..............................................................................9
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button .................................................... 10
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button.................................... 11
Touch Controls ..................................................................................... 12
The DISP Button..................................................................................... 18
The X and W Buttons................................................................... 20
The A (L) Button ............................................................................. 20
The G Button.................................................................................... 21
The i Button (i Icon)........................................................................ 24
The Function Buttons (Fn1 and Fn2)............................................... 27
The Flash Pop-Up Control................................................................. 29
First Steps
30
Attach the Camera Strap ........................................................... 30
Charge the Battery...................................................................... 31
The Battery Charger............................................................................ 31
vi
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card.................................... 32
Attach a Lens................................................................................ 36
Turn the Camera On ................................................................... 38
Basic Photography and Playback
40
Taking Photographs (b Mode) ................................................ 40
Shooting Movies (b Mode).......................................................44
Basic Playback..............................................................................48
Viewing Movies .................................................................................... 48
Deleting Unwanted Pictures ........................................................... 50
Basic Settings
51
Focus.............................................................................................. 51
Choosing a Focus Mode.................................................................... 51
AF-Area Mode ....................................................................................... 54
The Touch Shutter............................................................................... 59
Manual Focus ........................................................................................ 61
White Balance ..............................................................................63
Silent Photography.....................................................................67
Rating Pictures............................................................................. 69
Protecting Pictures from Deletion ........................................... 70
Shooting Controls
71
The Mode Dial..............................................................................71
P: Programmed Auto .......................................................................... 72
S: Shutter-Priority Auto ...................................................................... 72
A: Aperture-Priority Auto................................................................... 73
M: Manual................................................................................................ 74
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes ...................................................... 78
vii
h (Scene Modes) ..............................................................................80
k Portrait .......................................................................................81
l Landscape.................................................................................81
p Child............................................................................................81
m Sports..........................................................................................82
n Close up.....................................................................................82
o Night Portrait...........................................................................82
r Night Landscape ....................................................................83
s Party/Indoor.............................................................................83
t Beach/Snow .............................................................................83
d Sunset.........................................................................................84
e Dusk/Dawn...............................................................................84
f Pet Portrait ...............................................................................84
g Candlelight.................................................................................85
j Blossom......................................................................................85
z Autumn Colors ........................................................................85
0 Food .............................................................................................86
q (Special Effect Modes) ...............................................................87
4 Night Vision..............................................................................88
V Super Vivid................................................................................88
T Pop ............................................................................................88
U Photo Illustration....................................................................89
5 Toy Camera Effect ..................................................................89
6 Miniature Effect ......................................................................90
7 Selective Color ........................................................................90
1 Silhouette..................................................................................91
2 High Key ....................................................................................91
3 Low Key .....................................................................................91
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button...............................................96
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.............................................................97
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button................................98
The A (L) Button................................................................... 100
Autoexposure (AE) Lock ................................................................. 100
Focus Lock ........................................................................................... 100
viii
The Built-In Flash.......................................................................103
Flash Modes.........................................................................................104
Flash Compensation.........................................................................107
FV Lock ..................................................................................................108
The i Menu
110
Using the i Menu ......................................................................110
The Photo-Mode i Menu.........................................................111
Set Picture Control ............................................................................112
White Balance .....................................................................................116
Image Quality......................................................................................122
Image Size ............................................................................................124
Flash Mode...........................................................................................125
Metering................................................................................................127
Wi-Fi Connection ...............................................................................128
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................129
Release Mode......................................................................................131
Optical VR .............................................................................................135
AF-Area Mode .....................................................................................136
Focus Mode .........................................................................................136
The Movie-Mode i Menu.........................................................137
Set Picture Control ............................................................................138
White Balance .....................................................................................138
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality.............................139
Microphone Sensitivity....................................................................141
Wind Noise Reduction .....................................................................142
Metering................................................................................................143
Wi-Fi Connection ...............................................................................143
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................143
Electronic VR........................................................................................143
Optical VR .............................................................................................144
AF-Area Mode .....................................................................................144
Focus Mode .........................................................................................144
ix
More About Playback
145
Viewing Pictures ....................................................................... 145
Full-Frame Playback ......................................................................... 145
Thumbnail Playback......................................................................... 146
Photo Information.................................................................... 147
The i Button: Playback............................................................ 155
Select to Send/Deselect.................................................................. 157
Choose Start/End Point................................................................... 158
Save Current Frame.......................................................................... 161
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 162
Deleting Pictures ...................................................................... 164
During Playback................................................................................. 164
The Playback Menu .......................................................................... 165
Menu Guide
167
Defaults ...................................................................................... 167
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images .......................... 178
Delete ........................................................................................... 179
Playback Folder......................................................................... 179
Playback Display Options...................................................... 179
Image Review ............................................................................ 180
After Delete ................................................................................ 180
Rotate Tall ................................................................................... 181
Slide Show .................................................................................. 182
Rating ........................................................................................... 183
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options .............. 184
Reset Photo Shooting Menu ................................................ 185
Storage Folder........................................................................... 185
File Naming ................................................................................ 189
Choose Image Area ................................................................. 189
Image Quality ............................................................................ 190
Image Size................................................................................... 190
NEF (RAW) Recording ............................................................. 191
x
ISO Sensitivity Settings...........................................................192
White Balance ............................................................................194
Set Picture Control ...................................................................200
Manage Picture Control .........................................................202
Color Space.................................................................................205
Active D-Lighting......................................................................205
Long Exposure NR ....................................................................206
High ISO NR ................................................................................206
Vignette Control .......................................................................207
Diffraction Compensation.....................................................207
Auto Distortion Control..........................................................207
Flicker Reduction Shooting...................................................208
Metering ......................................................................................208
Flash Control ..............................................................................209
Flash Mode..................................................................................211
Flash Compensation................................................................212
Release Mode.............................................................................212
Focus Mode ................................................................................212
AF-Area Mode ............................................................................212
Optical VR ....................................................................................212
Auto Bracketing ........................................................................213
Multiple Exposure ....................................................................223
HDR (High Dynamic Range)..................................................230
Interval Timer Shooting .........................................................235
Time-Lapse Movie ....................................................................245
Silent Photography..................................................................252
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ...253
Reset Movie Shooting Menu ................................................254
File Naming.................................................................................254
Frame Size/Frame Rate...........................................................254
Movie Quality.............................................................................254
Movie File Type .........................................................................254
ISO Sensitivity Settings...........................................................255
White Balance ............................................................................255
xi
Set Picture Control................................................................... 256
Manage Picture Control......................................................... 256
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................... 256
High ISO NR ................................................................................ 256
Vignette Control....................................................................... 257
Diffraction Compensation .................................................... 257
Auto Distortion Control ......................................................... 257
Flicker Reduction...................................................................... 257
Metering...................................................................................... 258
Release Mode (Save Frame) ................................................. 258
Focus Mode................................................................................ 258
AF-Area Mode............................................................................ 258
Optical VR.................................................................................... 259
Electronic VR .............................................................................. 259
Microphone Sensitivity .......................................................... 259
Attenuator .................................................................................. 260
Frequency Response............................................................... 260
Wind Noise Reduction............................................................ 260
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings............ 261
Reset Custom Settings ........................................................... 264
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 265
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 265
a2: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection............................... 265
a3: Focus Points Used ............................................................. 266
a4: AF Activation....................................................................... 266
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around.............................................. 266
a6: Focus Point Options ......................................................... 267
a7: Low-Light AF....................................................................... 267
a8: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator......................................... 268
a9: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode.................................... 269
xii
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................270
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl ...........................................270
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................270
b3: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................271
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure ........................................271
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................272
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L..........................................272
c2: Self-Timer..............................................................................272
c3: Power Off Delay..................................................................273
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................274
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed...............................................274
d2: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................274
d3: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................274
d4: Shutter Type........................................................................275
d5: Limit Selectable Image Area..........................................275
d6: File Number Sequence....................................................276
d7: Apply Settings to Live View...........................................277
d8: Framing Grid Display .......................................................277
d9: Peaking Highlights............................................................277
d10: View All in Continuous Mode .....................................277
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................278
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................278
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................279
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash...............................................279
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control ......................................279
e5: Bracketing Order................................................................280
f: Controls.........................................................................................281
f1: Customize i Menu ...........................................................281
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)...........................................282
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)............................................288
f4: Customize Command Dials.............................................290
f5: Release Button to Use Dial ..............................................292
f6: Reverse Indicators ..............................................................292
xiii
g: Movie............................................................................................ 293
g1: Customize i Menu ......................................................... 293
g2: Custom Controls ............................................................... 294
g3: AF Speed .............................................................................. 299
g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity.................................................... 299
g5: Highlight Display .............................................................. 300
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................... 301
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 302
Save User Settings ................................................................... 302
Reset User Settings.................................................................. 302
Language .................................................................................... 302
Time Zone and Date................................................................ 303
Monitor Brightness.................................................................. 303
Viewfinder Brightness ............................................................ 304
Viewfinder Color Balance ...................................................... 305
Information Display................................................................. 306
AF Fine-Tune.............................................................................. 307
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 308
Image Comment ...................................................................... 310
Copyright Information ........................................................... 311
Beep Options ............................................................................. 312
Touch Controls.......................................................................... 312
Self-Portrait Mode.................................................................... 313
HDMI............................................................................................. 313
Location Data Display............................................................. 313
Airplane Mode........................................................................... 313
Connect to Smart Device ...................................................... 314
Connect to PC............................................................................ 316
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options...................................... 319
Conformity Marking................................................................ 320
Energy Saving............................................................................ 321
Slot Empty Release Lock........................................................ 321
Reset All Settings...................................................................... 322
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 322
xiv
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ...........323
NEF (RAW) Processing.............................................................326
Trim................................................................................................329
Resize ............................................................................................330
D-Lighting ...................................................................................332
Quick Retouch ...........................................................................332
Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................333
Straighten....................................................................................333
Distortion Control.....................................................................334
Perspective Control .................................................................335
Image Overlay............................................................................336
Trim Movie ..................................................................................339
Side-by-Side Comparison......................................................339
O My Menu/m Recent Settings..............................................341
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers
or Smart Devices
346
Network Options .......................................................................346
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi.......................................347
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You.............................................................347
The Wireless Transmitter Utility ...................................................347
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes.....................................348
Connecting in Access-Point Mode ..............................................349
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode.............................................353
Uploading Pictures............................................................................360
Disconnecting and Reconnecting ...............................................364
Connecting to Smart Devices .................................................365
The SnapBridge App.........................................................................365
What SnapBridge Can Do for You................................................365
Wireless Connections.......................................................................366
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)..............................................367
Connecting via Bluetooth...............................................................373
Troubleshooting........................................................................386
xv
Connecting to Other Devices
387
Connecting to Computers Via USB ....................................... 387
Installing ViewNX-i............................................................................ 388
Copying Pictures to the Computer............................................. 389
Connecting to Printers ............................................................ 392
Printing Pictures One at a Time.................................................... 393
Printing Multiple Pictures............................................................... 394
Connecting to HDMI Devices ................................................. 395
Connecting to Other HDMI Devices ........................................... 396
On-Camera Flash Photography
397
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”.............................................. 397
Camera-Mounted Flash Units....................................................... 397
Remote Flash Photography........................................................... 397
Using an On-Camera Flash ..................................................... 398
Flash Control Mode.................................................................. 400
Remote Flash Photography
401
About Remote Flash Photography ....................................... 401
Controlling Remote Flash Units............................................. 402
Using the SB-500 ............................................................................... 402
Troubleshooting
405
Before Contacting Customer Support.................................. 405
Problems and Solutions .......................................................... 406
Battery/Display................................................................................... 406
Shooting............................................................................................... 406
Playback................................................................................................ 410
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)................................. 411
Miscellaneous..................................................................................... 411
Indicators and Error Messages............................................... 412
Indicators.............................................................................................. 412
Error Messages ................................................................................... 414
xvi
Technical Notes
416
Compatible Lenses....................................................................416
The Camera Display ..................................................................417
The Monitor: Photo Mode ..............................................................417
The Monitor: Movie Mode ..............................................................422
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode.........................................................423
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode.........................................................425
The Nikon Creative Lighting System .....................................426
Other Accessories......................................................................431
Charging AC Adapters .....................................................................433
Software......................................................................................436
Caring for the Camera ..............................................................437
Storage ..................................................................................................437
Cleaning ................................................................................................437
Cleaning the Image Sensor ............................................................438
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions......................440
Specifications.............................................................................445
Approved Memory Cards ........................................................456
Memory Card Capacity.............................................................457
Battery Endurance ....................................................................458
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual .......................................................................459
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual .......................................................................469
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash and AF-Assist
Illuminator.............................................................................479
Trademarks and Licenses ........................................................481
Index ............................................................................................484
xvii
Menu List
The camera offers the following menus. For a more complete
description of individual menu items, refer to the “Menu Guide”
chapter in the Reference Manual.
PLAYBACK MENU
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Rating
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
xviii
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range)
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse movie
Silent photography
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
Reset custom settings
a Autofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection
Auto-area AF face/eye
a2
detection
a3 Focus points used
a4 AF activation
a5 Focus point wrap-around
a6 Focus point options
a7 Low-light AF
Built-in AF-assist
a8
illuminator
Manual focus ring in AF
a9
mode
b Metering/exposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
Easy exposure
b2
compensation
b3 Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal
b4
exposure
c Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button
c1
AE-L
c2 Self-timer
c3 Power off delay
xix
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
d Shooting/display
d1 CL mode shooting speed
d2 Max. continuous release
d3 Exposure delay mode
d4 Shutter type
Limit selectable image
d5
area
d6 File number sequence
d7 Apply settings to live view
d8 Framing grid display
d9 Peaking highlights
View all in continuous
d10
mode
e Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed
e2 Flash shutter speed
e3 Exposure comp. for flash
Auto c ISO sensitivity
e4
control
e5 Bracketing order
xx
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
f Controls
f1 Customize i menu
Custom controls
f2
(shooting)
Custom controls
f3
(playback)
f4 Customize command dials
f5 Release button to use dial
f6 Reverse indicators
g Movie
g1 Customize i menu
g2 Custom controls
g3 AF speed
g4 AF tracking sensitivity
g5 Highlight display
SETUP MENU
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Copyright information
Beep options
Touch controls
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Connect to PC
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
RETOUCH MENU
NEF (RAW) processing
Trim
Resize
D-Lighting
Quick retouch
Red-eye correction
Straighten
Distortion control
Perspective control
Image overlay
Trim movie
Side-by-side comparison *
MY MENU
Add items
Remove items
Rank items
Choose tab
* Can only be displayed by pressing i and
selecting Retouch when a retouched
image or original is displayed.
xxi
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read
them.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a
high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
• Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts
that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
• Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
• Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
• Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
xxii
• Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
• Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor
vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
• Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not
specifically designated for use with this product. When using
batteries, chargers, AC adapters, and USB cables designated for use
with this product, do not:
- Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them
under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
- Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
xxiii
• Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
• Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
• Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories
attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
• Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
- Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
- Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
- Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
- Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
xxiv
• Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
WARNING (Batteries)
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
• Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or
otherwise damaged by animals.
• Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL25 rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xxv
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any
this product may be reproduced,
damages resulting from the use of
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
this product.
retrieval system, or translated into
• While every effort has been made to
any language in any form, by any
ensure that the information in these
means, without Nikon’s prior written manuals is accurate and complete,
permission.
we would appreciate it were you to
• Nikon reserves the right to change
bring any errors or omissions to the
the appearance and specifications
attention of the Nikon
of the hardware and software
representative in your area (address
described in these manuals at any
provided separately).
time and without prior notice.
xxvi
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied • Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
or reproduced
The government has issued cautions
Do not copy or reproduce paper
on copies or reproductions of
money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local
securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
government bonds, even if such
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
copies or reproductions are
or coupon tickets, except when a
stamped “Sample.”
minimum of necessary copies are to
The copying or reproduction of
be provided for business use by a
paper money, coins, or securities
company. Also, do not copy or
which are circulated in a foreign
reproduce passports issued by the
country is prohibited.
government, licenses issued by
Unless the prior permission of the
public agencies and private groups,
government has been obtained, the ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
copying or reproduction of unused
and meal coupons.
postage stamps or post cards issued
• Comply with copyright notices
by the government is prohibited.
Under copyright law, photographs
The copying or reproduction of
or recordings of copyrighted works
stamps issued by the government
made with the camera cannot be
and of certified documents
used without the permission of the
stipulated by law is prohibited.
copyright holder. Exceptions apply
to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in
the case of photographs or
recordings of exhibits or live
performances.
xxvii
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses,
chargers, batteries, charging AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by
Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and
proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
D Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
xxviii
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the names and
functions of camera controls and displays. You may find it
helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read
through the rest of the manual.
Parts of the Camera
Refer to this section for the names and locations of camera
controls and displays.
Camera Body
2
5
6
7
8
1
4
3
1
9
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
Eyelet for camera strap................ 30
Stereo microphone....................... 45
Speaker............................................ 49
Movie-record button ................... 44
Power switch............................38, 40
Shutter-release button................ 40
E button......................................... 98
11 10
S button .................................... 96
Main command dial........................9
Photo/movie selector............40, 44
Mode dial........................................ 71
Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)..................................... 398, 426
13 Focal plane mark (E) ................. 62
8
9
10
11
12
Getting to Know the Camera
1
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
2
3
8
4
9
5
10
11
7
6
12
1 AF-assist illuminator ............42, 268 6 Lens mounting mark ....................36
Red-eye reduction lamp... 104, 125 7 Image sensor ............................... 438
Self-timer lamp ........................... 134 8 Connector for external
2 Built-in flash...........................29, 103
microphone ............................... 431
3 Flash pop-up control ...........29, 103 9 USB connector ................... 387, 392
4 Cover for microphone connector 10 Charge lamp ................................ 434
5 Cover for USB and HDMI
11 HDMI connector ......................... 395
connectors
12 Body cap.................................36, 431
D Do Not Touch the Image Sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert
pressure on the image sensor, poke it with
cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could
scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For
information on cleaning the image sensor,
see “Cleaning the Image Sensor” (0 438).
2
Getting to Know the Camera
Image sensor
12
3 4 5
6
7
8
9
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16 15 14
Monitor mode button.....................8
Viewfinder eyepiece...................432
Viewfinder .........................................7
Eye sensor..........................................7
Diopter adjustment control ..........7
A (L) button ..............20, 70, 100
J button ........................................ 21
Multi selector ................................. 21
Memory card access lamp.... 43, 133
13 12 11 10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
G button........................... 21, 167
O button ......................................... 50
K button ....................................... 48
i button................................. 24, 110
DISP button..................................... 18
W button............ 20, 23, 49, 146
X button .......... 20, 49, 61, 145, 162
Monitor .....................................12, 59
D The Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be adjusted as shown.
Getting to Know the Camera
3
The Camera Body (Continued)
6
7
1
8
2
3
4
9
5
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sub-command dial ................9, 290 7 Lens release button ......................37
Fn1 button ..............27, 63, 282, 294 8 CPU contacts
Fn2 button ..............27, 51, 282, 294 9 Tripod socket ..................................76
Battery-chamber cover latch......32 10 Battery latch ...................................32
Battery-chamber cover ................32 11 Memory card slot ..........................32
Lens mount .....................................36
D Product Serial Number
The serial number for this product can be
found by opening the monitor.
4
Getting to Know the Camera
The Monitor and Viewfinder
At default settings, the following
indicators appear in the monitor and
viewfinder in photo mode; for a full list of
indicators, see “The Camera Display”
(0 417).
Monitor
Viewfinder
21 23 24 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9
1 23456 7 8
26
25
24
23
22
21
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
9
10
11
12
26
2
19
13
20 1 22 18 17 12 16 15 14 13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Shooting mode ............................. 71
Focus point...............................42, 54
Release mode ..............................131
Focus mode.................................... 51
AF-area mode ................................ 54
Active D-Lighting........................129
Picture Control....................112, 200
White balance.............. 63, 116, 194
Image size............................124, 190
Image quality......................122, 190
i icon.......................................16, 24
12 Exposure indicator ....................... 75
Exposure compensation
display ........................................... 98
13 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
14 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 34, 457
15 ISO sensitivity ................................ 96
16 ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .... 97
Getting to Know the Camera
5
17
18
19
20
21
Aperture...........................................73
Shutter speed ..........................72, 74
Subject tracking.............................58
Metering ..................... 127, 208, 258
Battery indicator ............................34
22
23
24
25
26
Shutter type................................. 275
“Clock not set” indicator..............39
Optical VR indicator.......... 135, 212
Touch shooting ....................... 12, 59
AF-area brackets............................55
The following items appear in movie
mode.
Monitor
Viewfinder
1
1
24
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
6
1 Recording indicator ......................44
Recording disabled .......................45
2 Frame size and rate/
image quality.................... 139, 254
3 Time remaining..............................44
4 File name ...................................... 254
6
Getting to Know the Camera
7 8
5 3
5 Release mode
(still photography) ................... 258
6 Sound level .................................. 141
7 Microphone sensitivity .... 141, 259
8 Frequency response .................. 260
Camera Controls
This section outlines how to use various camera controls and
displays.
The Viewfinder
Placing your eye to the viewfinder
activates the eye sensor, switching the
display from the monitor to the
viewfinder (note that the eye sensor will
also respond to other objects, such as
your fingers). The viewfinder can be used Eye sensor
for menus and playback if desired.
D The Diopter Adjustment Control
To focus the viewfinder, rotate the diopter
adjustment control, being careful not to put
your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
A Extended Use
When using the viewfinder for extended periods, you can adjust
viewfinder brightness and hue for ease of viewing by selecting Off for
Custom Setting d7 (Apply settings to live view).
Getting to Know the Camera
7
The Monitor Mode Button
Press the monitor mode button to cycle
between viewfinder and monitor
displays.
Press the monitor mode button to cycle through the displays as
follows.
Automatic display switch: The display switches from the
monitor to the viewfinder when you place your eye
to the viewfinder, and from the viewfinder to the
monitor when you take your eye away.
Viewfinder only: The viewfinder is used for shooting,
menus, and playback; the monitor remains blank.
Monitor only: The monitor is used for shooting, menus,
and playback; the viewfinder display will remain
blank even if you put your eye to the viewfinder.
8
Getting to Know the Camera
The Mode Dial
Rotate the mode dial to
Mode dial
choose from the following
modes:
• b Auto: A “point-and-shoot”
mode in which the camera
sets exposure and hue
(0 40, 44).
• P Programmed auto: The camera sets shutter speed and aperture
for optimal exposure.
• S Shutter-priority auto: You choose the shutter speed; the camera
selects the aperture for best results.
• A Aperture-priority auto: You choose the aperture; the camera
selects the shutter speed for best results.
• M Manual: You control both shutter speed and aperture.
• EFCT Special effects: Take pictures with added special effects.
• U1/U2 User settings modes: Assign frequently-used settings.
• SCN Scene: Use for subjects of a selected type.
The Command Dials
Use the command dials to adjust shutter
speed or aperture or in combination
with other buttons to change camera
settings.
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Getting to Know the Camera
9
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button
The camera adjusts its sensitivity to light
(ISO sensitivity) in response to the
lighting conditions in effect at the time
the picture is taken.
❚❚ Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted in all modes except b and 4.
• To adjust ISO sensitivity, hold the S button and rotate the
main command dial.
• Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200, or select Hi 1 or
Hi 2.
• In modes P, S, A, and M, auto ISO sensitivity control can be
turned on or off by holding the S button and rotating the
sub-command dial; ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO
sensitivity control is on and ISO when it is not. In h modes and
in q modes other than 4, auto ISO sensitivity control can be
turned on or off by holding the S button and rotating the
main command dial.
❚❚ Movie Mode
ISO sensitivity adjustment is available only in mode M.
• When Off is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
control (mode M), ISO sensitivity will be set to the value selected
for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity (mode M).
• Auto ISO sensitivity control can be turned on or off by holding
the S button and rotating the sub-command dial; ISO AUTO is
displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on and ISO when
it is not.
10 Getting to Know the Camera
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button
Exposure compensation alters exposure from the value chosen
by the camera. Use it to make pictures brighter or darker.
Exposure
compensation: −1 EV
No exposure
compensation
Exposure
compensation: +1 EV
• Exposure compensation can be
adjusted by holding the E button and
rotating either command dial.
• Choose higher values to make the
picture brighter, lower values to make
it darker.
Getting to Know the Camera 11
Touch Controls
The touch-sensitive monitor can be used
to adjust camera settings, focus and
release the shutter, view photos and
movies, enter text, and navigate the
menus. Touch controls are not available
while the viewfinder is in use.
❚❚ Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
Touch the monitor to focus on the
selected point (touch AF). In photo
mode, the shutter will be released when
you lift your finger from the display
(touch shutter).
Touch AF settings can be adjusted by
tapping the W icon (0 59).
❚❚ Adjusting Settings
Tap highlighted settings in the display
and choose the desired option by
tapping icons or sliders. Tap Z or press
J to select the chosen option and
return to the previous display.
12 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚ Taking Pictures in Self-Portrait Mode
• Self-portrait mode is selected automatically when the monitor
is in the self-portrait position.
• In self-portrait mode, exposure
Self-timer
compensation and self-timer settings
can be adjusted using touch controls.
• Tap the self-timer icon to choose the
shutter-release delay and the number
of pictures taken.
• Tap the exposure compensation icon
Exposure compensation
to adjust exposure.
• Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus. Press it the rest of the way down to take
photographs.
• You can also focus and take photographs using touch controls.
• In movie mode, movies can be recorded using the movierecord button.
• To exit self-portrait mode, rotate the monitor out of the selfportrait position.
Getting to Know the Camera 13
D Self-Portrait Mode
Note the following:
• Selecting self-portrait mode disables all controls except the power
switch, shutter-release button, movie-record button, photo/movie
selector, mode dial, and flash pop-up control.
• If the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) >
Standby timer is less than a minute, the timer will expire if no
operations are performed for about a minute; otherwise, the timer
will expire normally.
• Rotating the monitor to the self-portrait position will not activate
self-portrait mode if Disable is selected for Self-portrait mode
(0 313).
❚❚ Playback
Flick left or right to view other pictures
during full-frame playback.
In full-frame view, touching the bottom
of the display brings up a frameadvance bar. Slide your finger left or
right over the bar to scroll rapidly to
other pictures.
Frame advance bar
14 Getting to Know the Camera
Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom
in and out and slide to scroll. You can
also give the display two quick taps to
zoom in from full-frame playback or
cancel zoom.
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a
pinch gesture in full-frame playback. Use
pinch and stretch to choose the number
of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72
frames.
❚❚ Movie Playback
Tap the on-screen guide to start movie
playback (movies are indicated by a 1
icon). Tap the display to pause or resume,
or tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
Guide
Getting to Know the Camera 15
❚❚ The i Menu
Tap the i icon to display the i menu
during shooting (0 24, 110).
Tap items to view options.
❚❚ Text Entry
When a keyboard is displayed, you can
enter text by tapping the keys (to cycle
through the upper- and lower-case and
symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard
selection button) or move the cursor by
tapping in the text display area.
Text display area
Keyboard
area
16 Getting to Know the Camera
Keyboard
selection
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Slide up or down to scroll.
Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
Tap menu items to display options and
tap icons or sliders to change.
To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
D The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films, when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands, or when touched simultaneously in
multiple locations. Do not use excessive force or touch the screen with
sharp objects.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
option in the setup menu.
Getting to Know the Camera 17
The DISP Button
Use the DISP button to view or hide
indicators in the monitor or viewfinder.
❚❚ Photo Mode
In photo mode, tapping the DISP button cycles the display as
follows:
Indicators on
Simplified display
Information display 2
(0 420)
Histogram 1
Virtual horizon
1 Not displayed during multiple exposure photography or when Off is
selected for Custom Setting d7 (Apply settings to live view).
2 Not displayed in the viewfinder.
18 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚ Movie Mode
In movie mode, tapping the DISP button cycles the display as
follows:
Indicators on
Simplified display
Virtual horizon
Histogram
Getting to Know the Camera 19
The X and W Buttons
The X and W buttons are used to
zoom the display in the monitor in or out
during shooting and playback.
❚❚ Shooting
Tap X to zoom in on the display in the
monitor. Tap X to increase the zoom ratio, W to zoom out.
❚❚ Playback
Tap X to zoom in on pictures during full-frame playback. Tap X
to increase the zoom ratio, W to zoom out. Tapping W
when the picture is displayed full frame “zooms out” to the
thumbnail list.
The A (L) Button
The A (L) button can be used during
shooting to lock focus and exposure and
during playback to protect the current
image.
❚❚ Shooting
Press the A (L) button to lock focus and exposure.
❚❚ Playback
Protect the current image.
20 Getting to Know the Camera
The G Button
Press the G button to view the menus.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D: Playback menu .................... 178
C: Photo shooting menu........ 184
1: Movie shooting menu......... 253
A: Custom Settings menu....... 261
B: Setup menu............................. 301
N: Retouch menu...................... 323
O/m: My Menu or
recent settings (defaults to
My Menu).................................... 341
8 d: Help icon .................................. 23
9 Current settings .......................... 167
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
❚❚ Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J
button.
1: Move cursor up
J: Select highlighted
item
4: Cancel and return to
previous menu
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
3: Move cursor down
Getting to Know the Camera 21
1 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
2 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
3 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
4 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item (items that are
displayed in gray are not
currently available and
cannot be selected).
22 Getting to Know the Camera
5 Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu
item.
6 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option (options that are
displayed in gray are not
currently available and
cannot be selected).
7 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode,
press the shutter-release button halfway.
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 17).
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon appears at the bottom left corner of the display, you can
view a description of the currently selected option or menu by tapping
the W button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll the text, or tap W again to
return to the menus.
Getting to Know the Camera 23
The i Button (i Icon)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button
or tap the i icon in the display.
or
Tap the desired item or highlight items
and press J to view options. You can
also adjust settings by highlighting
items and rotating the command dials.
The items displayed in photo mode differ
from those displayed in movie mode.
A The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback
displays a context-sensitive menu of
frequently-used playback options.
24 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚ Customizing the i Menu
The items displayed in the photo-mode i menu can be chosen
using Custom Setting f1 (Customize i menu).
1 Select Custom Setting f1.
In the Custom Settings menu,
highlight Custom Setting f1
(Customize i menu) and press J
(for information on using the menus,
see “The G Button”, 0 21).
2 Choose a position.
Highlight a position in the menu you
want to edit and press J.
3 Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to
assign it to the selected position and
return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4 Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
Getting to Know the Camera 25
A Options That Can Be Assigned to the i Menu
The following options can be assigned to the i menu for photo mode:
• Exposure delay
• Choose image area • Flash mode
mode
• Image quality
• Flash compensation
• Shutter type
• Image size
• Focus mode
• Apply settings to live
• Exposure
• AF-area mode
• Optical VR
view
compensation
• Auto bracketing
• Peaking highlights
• ISO sensitivity
• Multiple exposure
• Monitor/viewfinder
settings
brightness
• HDR (high dynamic
• White balance
• Set Picture Control
range)
• Bluetooth
connection
• Color space
• Silent photography
• Wi-Fi connection
• Active D-Lighting
• Release mode
• Custom controls
• Wireless remote
• Long exposure NR
connection
• High ISO NR
(shooting)
• Metering
The movie-mode i menu can be customized using Custom Setting g1
(Customize i menu); the options available differ from those for
photo mode.
26 Getting to Know the Camera
The Function Buttons (Fn1 and Fn2)
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons can also be used
Fn1 button
for quick access to selected settings
during shooting. The settings assigned
to these buttons can be chosen using
Custom Setting f2 (Custom controls
(shooting)) and the selected setting
adjusted by pressing the button and
Fn2 button
rotating the command dials. At default
settings, the Fn1 button is used for white
balance and the Fn2 button to select focus and AF-area modes.
❚❚ Customizing the Function Buttons
The function performed by the function buttons in photo mode
are chosen using Custom Setting f2 (Custom controls
(shooting)).
1 Select Custom Setting f2.
In the Custom Settings menu,
highlight Custom Setting f2 (Custom
controls (shooting)) and press J (for
information on using the menus, see
“The G Button”, 0 21).
2 Choose a button.
Highlight the option for the desired
button and press J. Select Fn1
button to choose the role played by
the Fn1 button, Fn2 button to choose
the role played by the Fn2 button.
Getting to Know the Camera 27
3 Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to
assign it to the selected button and
return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to choose the
role played by the remaining button.
4 Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
A Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons
The following roles can be assigned to the function buttons in photo
mode:
• Release mode
• Zoom on/off
• AF-ON
• Focus mode/AF-area
• MY MENU
• AF lock only
mode
• AE lock (Hold)
• Access top item in
MY MENU
• Auto bracketing
• AE lock (Reset on
• Multiple exposure
• Playback
release)
• Choose image area • HDR (high dynamic
• AE lock only
range)
• Image quality/size
• AE/AF lock
• Exposure delay
• White balance
• FV lock
mode
• Set Picture Control
• Flash off
• Peaking highlights
• Preview
• Active D-Lighting
• Metering
• None
• Bracketing burst
• Flash mode/
• + NEF (RAW)
• Framing grid display compensation
The roles played by the function buttons in movie mode can be chosen
using Custom Setting g2 (Custom controls); the options available
differ from those for photo mode.
28 Getting to Know the Camera
The Flash Pop-Up Control
Slide the flash pop-up control to raise
the built-in flash.
• Raise the built-in flash for flash
photography. The built-in flash will not
fire while lowered.
Getting to Know the Camera 29
First Steps
Complete the steps in this chapter before taking pictures for the
first time.
Attach the Camera Strap
A strap is supplied with the camera; additional straps are
available separately. Attach the strap securely to the camera
eyelets.
30 First Steps
Charge the Battery
The battery can be charged using the supplied battery charger.
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 xxii)
and “Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (0 440).
The Battery Charger
Insert the battery and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery
will fully charge in about 2 hours and 30 minutes.
In some countries or
regions, charger may be
supplied with adapter
connected.
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges.
Battery charging
(flashing)
Charging complete
(steady)
First Steps 31
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that the camera power switch is in the OFF position.
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to
keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch
locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it
straight into the slot until it clicks into place.
Front
32 First Steps
D Removing the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off
and open the battery-chamber cover. Press
the battery latch in the direction shown by
the arrow to release the battery and then
remove the battery by hand.
D Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card
access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open
the battery-chamber cover, and press the
card in to eject it (q). The card can then be
removed by hand (w).
First Steps 33
Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the shooting display while the
camera is on.
Monitor
Viewfinder
The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes,
from L through K and finally to H. When the battery level
falls to H, suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a
spare battery. When the battery is exhausted, the H icon will
flash; charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
When the camera is on, the shooting display show the number
of photographs that can be taken at current settings (values over
1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred; e.g., values
between 1400 and 1499 are shown as 1.4 k).
Monitor
34 First Steps
Viewfinder
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove the battery during formatting or while data are being
recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other device. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
D No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator and [–E–]
will appear in the shooting display.
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped
with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock”
Write-protect switch
position, the memory card cannot
be formatted and photos cannot
be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the monitor if
you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide
the switch to the “write” position.
First Steps 35
Attach a Lens
The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. Before attaching
or removing lenses, confirm that the camera power switch is in
the OFF position. Be careful to prevent dust from entering the
camera when the lens or body cap is removed, and be sure to
remove the lens cap before taking pictures. The lens generally
used in this manual for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z DX 16–
50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR.
Remove the
camera body cap
Remove the rear lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
G
Do not touch
the image
sensor or lens
contacts.
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
36 First Steps
D F Mount Lenses
Be sure to attach the FTZ mount adapter (available separately) before
using F mount lenses. Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to
the camera could damage the lens or image sensor.
D Detaching Lenses
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,
press and hold the lens release button (q)
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
First Steps 37
Turn the Camera On
When you first turn the camera on, you will be prompted to
choose a language using the multi selector and J button.
Press G and use the multi selector and
J button to set the camera clock. No
other operations can be performed until
the clock is set.
q
w
Select time zone
e
Select date format
r
Select daylight saving time
option
38 First Steps
Set time and date (note that
camera uses a 24-hour clock)
D The t (“Clock Not Set”) Icon
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed. Two days of charging will power the clock for about a month.
If a t icon flashes in the display, the clock has been reset and the date
and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct. Use the
Time zone and date > Date and time option in the setup menu to set
the clock to the correct time and date (0 303).
A SnapBridge
Use the SnapBridge app to synchronize the camera clock with the
clock on a smartphone or tablet (smart device). See SnapBridge online help for details.
First Steps 39
Basic Photography and Playback
This chapter explains the basics of taking and viewing photos.
Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Follow the steps below to take photographs in b (auto) mode,
an automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of
settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting
conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
The monitor will light.
2 Select photo mode.
Rotate the photo/movie
selector to C.
D Lenses with Retractable Barrels
Lenses with retractable barrels must be
extended before use. Rotate the lens zoom
ring as shown until the lens clicks into the
extended position.
40 Basic Photography and Playback
3 Select b mode.
Rotate the mode dial to b.
Mode dial
4 Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left. Bring your elbows in against the
sides of your chest.
Framing photos in the viewfinder
Landscape (wide) orientation
Portrait (tall) orientation
Framing photos in the monitor
Landscape (wide) orientation
Portrait (tall) orientation
Basic Photography and Playback 41
5 Frame the photograph.
Frame the shot with your subject in
the AF-area brackets.
AF-area brackets
6 Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
• If the subject is stationary, the focus
point will be displayed in green
when the camera focuses. If the
camera is unable to focus, the AFarea brackets will flash. If the subject
is in motion, the camera will
continue to adjust focus in response
Focus point
to changes in the distance to the
subject while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway; focus will not lock.
• The AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus
operation if the subject is poorly lit.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
42 Basic Photography and Playback
7 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way down to
take the photograph (you can also
take a photograph by touching the
monitor: touch your subject to focus
and lift your finger to release the
shutter). The memory card access
lamp will light while the photo is
recorded to the memory card. Do not
eject the memory card or remove the
battery until the lamp has gone out and
recording is complete.
Memory card
access lamp
D The Standby Timer
If no operations are performed for about
30 seconds, the display will dim before the
monitor and viewfinder turn off to reduce
the drain on the battery. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to reactivate the
display. The length of time before the
standby timer expires automatically can be
selected using Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby timer.
Basic Photography and Playback 43
Shooting Movies (b Mode)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple, “point-and-shoot”
movie recording.
1 Turn the camera on.
The monitor will light.
2 Select movie mode.
Rotate the photo/movie
selector to 1. Note that
the built-in flash and
optional flash units cannot
be used when the camera
is in movie mode.
3 Select b mode.
Rotate the mode dial to b.
Mode dial
44 Basic Photography and Playback
4 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to
start recording. While recording is in
progress, the camera will display a
recording indicator and the time
remaining. The camera can be
refocused at any time during
recording by tapping your subject in
the display. Sound is recorded via the
built-in microphone; do not cover
the microphone during recording.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
5 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording. The memory card
access lamp will light while the
camera finishes saving the movie to
the memory card. Do not eject the
memory card or remove the battery
until the lamp has gone out and
recording is complete.
Memory card
access lamp
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
Basic Photography and Playback 45
In movie mode, photos can be taken
without interrupting recording by
pressing the shutter-release button all
the way down. The release mode (singleframe or continuous) can be selected
before shooting begins using the
Release mode (save frame) option in the movie shooting menu
(note that regardless of the option chosen, only one photo can
be taken with each press while movie recording is in progress). A
C icon will flash in the display when a photo is taken.
D Taking Photos in Movie Mode
Note that photo-mode settings do not apply to photos taken in movie
mode and that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in
focus. Photos are recorded in fine-quality JPEG format at the
dimensions currently selected for movie frame size. When Continuous
is selected for Release mode (save frame) in the movie shooting
menu, the frame advance rate while recording is paused varies with
the option selected for Frame size/frame rate. Up to 40 photographs
can be taken with each movie.
46 Basic Photography and Playback
D During Shooting
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in
photos and movies shot under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium
lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is
panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed
through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright
spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some
areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light
sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other
bright, momentary light source, while noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in
on the view through the lens. Flicker may occur when power aperture
is used during movie recording.
Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the
camera’s internal circuitry.
D Recording Movies
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached
or if the lens is removed, another mode is selected, or the photo/movie
selector is rotated to C. Note that the built-in microphone may record
sounds made by the camera or lens during optical vibration reduction,
autofocus, or changes to aperture.
Basic Photography and Playback 47
Basic Playback
Photographs and movies can be viewed on the camera.
1 Press the K button.
A picture will appear in the display.
2 View additional pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional
pictures. When pictures are displayed
in the monitor, you can view other
pictures by flicking a finger left or
right over the display. To end
playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the on-screen guide or
press J to start playback; your current position is shown on the
movie progress bar.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Guide
Movie Volume
progress
bar
48 Basic Photography and Playback
Guide
The following operations can be performed:
Operation
Pause
Play
Rewind/advance
Start slow-motion
playback
Skip 10 s
Skip to last or first
frame
Adjust volume
Trim movie
Exit
Return to shooting
mode
Description
Press 3 to pause playback.
Press J to resume playback when playback is paused
or during rewind/advance.
Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases
with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep the
control pressed to skip to the beginning or end of the
movie (the first frame is indicated by a h in the top
right corner of the display, the last frame by a i). If
playback is paused, the movie rewinds or advances
one frame at a time; keep the control pressed for
continuous rewind or advance.
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slowmotion playback.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead
or back 10 s.
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first
frame.
Tap X to increase volume, W to decrease.
To view movie editing options, pause playback and
press the i button.
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to end
playback.
Basic Photography and Playback 49
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture. Note that
pictures cannot be recovered once deleted.
1 Display a picture you wish to delete.
Display a photo or movie you wish to
delete as described in “Basic
Playback” (0 48).
2 Delete the picture.
Press the O button. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press the O
button again to delete the picture
and return to playback. To exit
without deleting the picture, press
K.
A Delete
To delete selected pictures, all pictures taken on selected dates, or all
pictures in a chosen location on the memory card, use the Delete
option in the playback menu.
50 Basic Photography and Playback
Basic Settings
This chapter covers basic shooting and playback settings.
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically, manually, or using touch
controls. How the camera focuses is governed by your choice of
focus mode and AF-area mode.
Choosing a Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the
camera focuses. The focus mode can be
selected using the Focus mode items in
the i menu and the photo and movie
shooting menus (0 136, 212, 258).
At default settings, the focus mode can
also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the main
command dial (0 27).
Option
AF mode
AF-A autoswitch
Description
• The camera uses AF-S for stationary subjects, AF-C for
subjects that are in motion.
• AF mode auto-switch is available only in photo
mode.
Basic Settings 51
Option
AF-S
AF-C
AF-F
MF
Description
For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus,
the focus point will turn from red to green; focus will
Single AF
lock while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point
will flash red and the shutter release will be disabled.
For moving subjects. The camera focuses
continuously while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will
predict the final distance to the subject and adjust
Continuous
focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can
AF
only be released if the subject is in focus (focus
priority), but this can be changed to allow the shutter
to be released at any time (release priority) using
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection).
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to
subject movement or changes in composition. When
Full-time
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
AF
focus point will turn from red to green and focus will
lock. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual
Focus manually (0 61). The shutter can be released
focus
whether or not the subject is in focus.
52 Basic Settings
D Autofocus
The display may brighten or darken while the camera focuses and the
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus. The camera may be unable to focus using autofocus in
the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light
source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
D Turning the Camera Off
The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and then on
again after focusing.
Basic Settings 53
AF-Area Mode
The focus point can be positioned using
the multi selector. AF-area mode
controls how the camera selects the
focus-point for autofocus. The default
setting is Auto-area AF, but other
options can be selected using the AFarea mode items in the i menu and the photo and movie
shooting menus (0 136, 212, 258).
At default settings, AF-area mode can also be selected by
holding the Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial
(0 27).
Option
3 Pinpoint AF
d Single-point AF
54 Basic Settings
Description
Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
such as buildings, in-studio product
photography, or close-ups. Pinpoint AF is used for
pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame.
This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus
mode. Focusing may be slower than with singlepoint AF.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user. Use with stationary subjects.
Option
e
f
g
h
Description
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected
point, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points. Use for
Dynamic-area AF photographs of athletes and other active subjects
that are hard to frame using single-point AF. This
option is only available when photo mode is
selected and AF mode auto-switch or
Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
As for Single-point AF, except the camera
focuses on a wider area, the focus areas for WideWide-area AF (S) area AF (L) being larger than those for Widearea AF (S). Use for snapshots or photos of
moving subjects that are hard to frame using
single-point AF, or in movie mode for smooth
focus during panning and tilting shots or when
filming moving subjects. If the selected focus area
Wide-area AF (L) contains subjects at different distances from the
camera, the camera will assign priority to the
closest subject.
The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area. Use on occasions when you
don’t have time to select the focus point yourself,
for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-ofthe-moment photos. The camera gives priority to
portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected,
an amber border indicating the focus point will
Auto-area AF
appear around the subject’s face or, if the camera
detects the subject’s eyes, one or the other of
their eyes (face/eye-detection AF). This frees you
to concentrate on composition and your subject’s
expression when photographing active portrait
subjects (0 57). Subject tracking (0 58) can be
activated by pressing the J button.
Basic Settings 55
A s: The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except Auto-area AF, a dot appears in the focus
point when it is in the center of the frame.
A Quick Focus-Point Selection
For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for
Custom Setting a3 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the
available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area
AF (L) does not change).
56 Basic Settings
❚❚ Face/Eye-Detection AF
When photographing portrait subjects
with Auto-area AF, use Custom Setting
a2 (Auto-area AF face/eye detection)
to choose whether the camera detects
both faces and eyes (face/eye-detection
AF) or only faces (face-detection AF). If
Face and eye detection on is selected
and a portrait subject is detected, an
amber border indicating the focus point
will appear around the subject’s face or,
if the camera detects the subject’s eyes,
Focus point
one or the other of their eyes (face/eyedetection AF). Faces detected when Face
detection on is selected are similarly indicated by an amber
border. If AF-S is selected for focus mode, or if the camera is
shooting using AF-S when AF-A is selected for focus mode, the
focus point will turn green when the camera focuses.
If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is
detected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point, and you
will be able to position the focus point over a different face or
eye by pressing 4 or 2. If the subject looks away after their face
is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion.
During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for
focus by pressing J.
Basic Settings 57
D Face/Eye-Detection AF
Eye detection is not available in movie mode. Eye and face detection
may not perform as expected if:
• the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of
the frame,
• the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
• the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
• the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
• the subject moves excessively during shooting.
❚❚ Subject Tracking
When Auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode, pressing J enables focus
tracking. The focus point will change to a
targeting reticle; position the reticle over
the target and press J again to start
tracking. The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of
portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end
tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, tap
the W button.
D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave
the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar
in color or brightness to the background.
58 Basic Settings
The Touch Shutter
Touch controls can be used to focus and
release the shutter. Touch the display to
focus and lift your finger to release the
shutter.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to
choose the operation performed by
tapping the display in shooting mode.
Choose from the following options:
• W: Touch the display to position the
focus point and focus (if a face is
detected, the camera will focus on the face closest to the
selected point). Focus locks while your finger remains on the
display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in
photo mode.
• V: As above, except that lifting your finger from the display
does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it
moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it
in the display.
• X: Touch shutter disabled.
Basic Settings 59
D Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the W icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are
active. Touch shooting options can only be used to take pictures one at
a time and cannot be used for manual focus or to take photographs
during movie recording; for burst photography or to take photos
during movie recording, use the shutter-release button.
When eye-detection is enabled, the camera may fail to select the
desired eye when the user taps their subject’s face in the monitor, in
which case it may be necessary to use the multi selector to choose the
desired eye.
In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch
the monitor and the number of shots currently selected in self-timer
mode will be taken starting about 10 seconds after you lift your finger
from the display.
60 Basic Settings
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when
autofocus does not produce the desired
results. Position the focus point over
your subject and rotate the focus or
control ring until the subject is in focus.
For greater precision, tap the X button to
zoom in on the view through the lens.
When the subject is in focus, the focus
point will light green and the in-focus
indicator (I) will appear in the display
(electronic rangefinding).
In-focus
indicator
I
F
H
F H
(flashes)
Focus distance indicator
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera
and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
In-focus indicator
Camera unable to determine
whether subject is in focus.
When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus,
note that the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the
subject is not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and
check focus. Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is
having trouble focusing.
Basic Settings 61
D Lenses with Focus-Mode Selection
Manual focus can be selected using the controls on the lens.
D Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body. The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal
plane is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
16 mm
Focal plane mark
A Focus Peaking
If focus peaking is enabled using Custom
Setting d9 (Peaking highlights), objects
that are in focus will be indicated by colored
outlines in manual focus mode. Note that
peaking highlights may not be displayed if
the camera is unable to detect outlines, in
which case focus can be checked using the
view through the lens in the display.
62 Basic Settings
Area in focus
White Balance
White balance ensures that white objects appear white,
regardless of the color of the light source. The default setting
(j) is recommended with most light sources. If the desired
results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose
another option as described below.
White balance can be selected using the
White balance items in the i menu and
the photo and movie shooting menus
(0 116, 194, 255).
At default settings, white balance can also be selected by
holding the Fn1 button and rotating the main command dial
(0 27).
When 4 (Auto), I (Fluorescent), K (Choose color
temperature), or L (Preset manual) is selected, you can
choose a sub-option by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the
sub-command dial.
Basic Settings 63
Option
K*
4 Auto
Keep white (reduce warm
colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
3500–
8000
Keep warm lighting colors
D Natural light auto
4500–
8000
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically for optimal results with
most light sources. When the built-in
flash or an optional flash unit is used,
white balance will be adjusted
according to the lighting produced by
the flash.
Eliminate warm color cast produced
by incandescent lighting.
Partially preserve warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
Preserve warm color cast produced
by incandescent lighting.
When used under natural light, this
option produces colors closer to
those seen by the naked eye.
Use with subjects lit by direct
sunlight.
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
H Direct sunlight
5200
G
M
J
I
Cloudy
6000
Shade
8000 Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
Incandescent
3000 Use under incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
2700
Warm-white fluorescent
3000
Use under fluorescent lighting;
White fluorescent
3700
choose bulb type according to light
Cool-white fluorescent
4200 source.
Day white fluorescent
5000
Daylight fluorescent
6500
High temp. mercury-vapor 7200
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
64 Basic Settings
Option
K*
Description
Use with studio strobe lighting and
5400
5 Flash
other large flash units.
Choose color temperature from list of
Choose color
2500–
values or by holding Fn1 button and
K temperature
10,000
rotating sub-command dial.
Measure white balance for subject or
light source (press and hold Fn1
button to enter direct measurement
— mode, 0 119), copy white balance
L Preset manual
from existing photograph, or choose
existing value by holding Fn1 button
and rotating sub-command dial.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
A 4 (“Auto”)
The photo info for pictures shot using auto
white balance lists the color temperature
selected by the camera at the time the
picture was taken. You can use this as
reference when choosing a value for
Choose color temperature. To view
shooting data during playback, go to
Playback display options in the playback menu and select Shooting
data for Additional photo info.
Basic Settings 65
D D (“Natural Light Auto”)
D (Natural light auto) may not produce the desired results under
artificial light. Choose 4 (Auto) or an option that matches the light
source.
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
At settings other than Choose color temperature, white balance can
be fine-tuned using the White balance items in the i menu and the
photo and movie shooting menus (0 117).
D Studio Flash Lighting
4 (Auto) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash
units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to 5 (Flash) and
use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors
3000
4000
“Cooler” (bluer) colors
5000
6000
8000
10000 [ K ]
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to
intentionally make colors colder, higher values if your pictures are
tinged blue or to intentionally make colors warmer.
66 Basic Settings
Silent Photography
To enable the electronic shutter and
eliminate the noise and vibration caused
by operation of the mechanical shutter,
select On for Silent photography in the
photo shooting menu. Regardless of the
setting chosen for Beep options in the
setup menu, no beep will sound when the camera focuses or
while the self-timer is counting down. Note that the electronic
shutter will be used regardless of the option selected for Custom
Setting d4 (Shutter type).
An icon is displayed while silent
photography is in effect. In release
modes other than Continuous H
(extended), the display will briefly go
dark when the shutter is released to
signal that a photo has been taken.
Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates
for continuous release modes and disables some features,
including high ISO sensitivity (Hi 1, Hi 2), the flash, long exposure
noise reduction, and flicker reduction.
Basic Settings 67
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography mutes the shutter, but this does
not absolve photographers of the need to respect their subjects’
privacy and image rights. Although the noise of the mechanical
shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during
autofocus or aperture adjustment. During silent photography, flicker,
banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in the final
picture under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera or subject moves during shooting. Jagged edges, color
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or
bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and
other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated
by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
68 Basic Settings
Rating Pictures
Selected pictures can be rated or marked as candidates for later
deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in Capture NX-D and
ViewNX-i. Protected pictures cannot be rated.
1 Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback
and display a picture you want to rate.
2 Display the i menu.
Press the i button to view the
i menu.
3 Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press J.
4 Choose a rating.
Use the multi selector to choose a
rating of from zero to five stars, or
select d to mark the picture as a
candidate for later deletion. Press J
to complete the operation.
Basic Settings 69
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Use the A (L) button to protect pictures from accidental
deletion. Note that this does NOT prevent pictures being deleted
when the memory card is formatted.
1 Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback
and display a picture you want to
protect.
2 Press the A (L) button.
Protected pictures are indicated by a
P icon; to remove protection, display
the picture and press the A (L)
button again.
A Removing Protection from All Pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently
selected for Playback folder in the playback menu, select Unprotect
all in the i menu.
70 Basic Settings
Shooting Controls
This chapter describes controls that can be used during
shooting.
The Mode Dial
Rotate the mode dial to
choose from the following
modes:
• b Auto: A “point-and-shoot”
mode in which the camera
sets exposure and hue
Mode dial
(0 40, 44).
• P Programmed auto: The camera sets shutter speed and aperture
for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in
other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera
settings.
• S Shutter-priority auto: You choose the shutter speed; the camera
selects the aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
motion.
• A Aperture-priority auto: You choose the aperture; the camera
selects the shutter speed for best results. Use to blur
backgrounds or bring both foreground and background into
focus.
• M Manual: You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set
shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.
• EFCT Special effects: Take pictures with added special effects.
• U1/U2 User settings modes: Assign frequently-used settings to
these positions for quick recall.
• SCN Scene: Use for subjects of a selected type.
Shooting Controls 71
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically
adjusts shutter speed and aperture
according to a built-in program to
ensure optimal exposure in most
situations. Different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture that
produce the same exposure can be selected by rotating the
main command dial (“flexible program”). While flexible program
is in effect, a flexible program indicator (U) is displayed. To
restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the
main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,
choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the
shutter speed while the camera
automatically selects the aperture that
will produce the optimal exposure. To
choose a shutter speed, rotate the main
command dial. Shutter speed can be set
to values between 30 s and 1/4000 s.
72 Shooting Controls
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the
aperture while the camera automatically
selects the shutter speed that will
produce the optimal exposure. To
choose an aperture between the
minimum and maximum values for the
lens, rotate the sub-command dial.
A Movie Mode Exposure Settings
The following exposure settings can be adjusted in movie mode:
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity
P, S 1
—
—
—2
A
✔
—
—2
M
✔
✔
✔3
1 Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P.
2 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity option in the movie shooting menu.
3 If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO control (mode
M) in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the
Maximum sensitivity option.
Shooting Controls 73
M: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control
both shutter speed and aperture. Rotate
the main command dial to choose a
shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can
be set to values between 30 s and 1/4000 s,
Shutter
Aperture
or the shutter can be held open
speed
indefinitely for a long time-exposure
(0 76). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to
check exposure.
74 Shooting Controls
D Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators show whether the photograph would be
under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option
chosen for Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl), the
amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 or
1/2 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the
displays will flash.
Custom Setting b1 set to “1/3 step”
Underexposed
Overexposed
Optimal exposure
by 1/3 EV
by over 3 EV
Monitor
Viewfinder
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (Mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (0 97) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter
speed and aperture.
Shooting Controls 75
❚❚ Long Time-Exposures
Select the following shutter speeds for
long time-exposures of moving lights,
the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb: The shutter remains open while
the shutter-release button is held
down (note that this option functions • Shutter speed: Bulb
(35-second exposure)
in the same way as “time” when the
camera is used with an optional ML-L7 • Aperture: f/25
remote control).
• Time: The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is
pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
To prevent blur, mount the camera on a tripod. Nikon also
recommends using a fully-charged battery to prevent loss of
power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long
exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing On
for Long exposure NR in the photo shooting menu.
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
2 Select mode M.
Rotate the mode dial to M.
76 Shooting Controls
3 Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of
Bulb or Time.
Bulb
Time
4 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the
way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the
exposure is complete.
Time: After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the
way down.
5 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Shooting Controls 77
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the
mode dial.
❚❚ Saving User Settings
Follow the steps below to save settings:
1 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to camera settings, including:
• photo shooting menu options,
• movie shooting menu options,
• Custom Settings, and
• shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture
(modes A and M), flexible program (mode P), exposure
compensation, and auto bracketing.
2 Select Save user settings.
Highlight Save user settings in the
setup menu and press 2.
3 Select a position.
Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2 and press 2.
4 Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings
selected in Step 1 to the mode dial position selected in Step 3.
78 Shooting Controls
❚❚ Recalling User Settings
Rotating the mode dial to U1
or U2 recalls the settings last
saved to that position.
❚❚ Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1 Select Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset user settings in the
setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a position.
Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset and press J to restore default settings for
the selected position. The camera will function in mode P.
D User Settings
The following cannot be saved to U1 or U2.
Photo shooting menu:
Movie shooting menu:
• Storage folder
• Manage Picture Control
• Choose image area
• Manage Picture Control
• Multiple exposure
• Interval timer shooting
• Time-lapse movie
Shooting Controls 79
h (Scene Modes)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described in “Taking
Photographs (b Mode)” (0 40).
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to h and rotating the main command dial until the desired
scene appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial
k
l
p
m
n
o
r
s
Main command dial
Portrait
Landscape
Child
Sports
Close up
Night Portrait
Night Landscape
Party/Indoor
80 Shooting Controls
t
d
e
f
g
j
z
0
Monitor
Beach/Snow
Sunset
Dusk/Dawn
Pet Portrait
Candlelight
Blossom
Autumn Colors
Food
k Portrait
Use for portraits with soft, naturallooking skin tones. If the subject is
far from the background or a
telephoto lens is used, background
details will be softened to lend the
composition a sense of depth.
l Landscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in
daylight.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
p Child
Use for snapshots of children.
Clothing and background details
are vividly rendered, while skin
tones remain soft and natural.
Shooting Controls 81
m Sports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion
for dynamic sports shots in which
the main subject stands out clearly.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
n Close up
Use for close-up shots of flowers,
insects, and other small objects.
o Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between
the main subject and the
background in portraits taken
under low light.
82 Shooting Controls
r Night Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors
when photographing night
landscapes, including street
lighting and neon signs.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
s Party/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor
background lighting. Use for
parties and other indoor scenes.
t Beach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit
expanses of water, snow, or sand.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
Shooting Controls 83
d Sunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in
sunsets and sunrises.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
e Dusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the
weak natural light before dawn or
after sunset.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
f Pet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
D Note
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
84 Shooting Controls
g Candlelight
For photographs taken by
candlelight.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
j Blossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes
featuring expanses of blossoms.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
z Autumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and
yellows in autumn leaves.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Shooting Controls 85
0 Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
D Note
If raised, the built-in flash will fire with every shot.
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
86 Shooting Controls
q (Special Effect Modes)
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and
shooting movies.
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to q and rotating the main command dial until the desired
option appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial
4
V
T
U
5
Main command dial
Night Vision
Super Vivid
Pop
Photo Illustration
Toy Camera Effect
6
7
1
2
3
Monitor
Miniature Effect
Selective Color
Silhouette
High Key
Low Key
Movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, and
1920 × 1080 slow-motion are not available in q mode.
Shooting Controls 87
4 Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high
ISO sensitivities.
D Note
Manual focus can be used if the camera is unable to focus. The built-in
flash turns off; optional flash units will not fire.
V Super Vivid
Overall saturation and contrast are
increased for a more vibrant image.
T Pop
Overall saturation is increased for a
more lively image.
88 Shooting Controls
U Photo Illustration
Sharpen outlines and simplify
coloring for a poster effect. Press J
to adjust settings (0 92).
D Notes
• Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a
series of stills.
• Autofocus is not available during movie recording.
5 Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies with
saturation and peripheral
illumination similar to pictures shot
with a toy camera. Press J to adjust
settings (0 92).
Shooting Controls 89
6 Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be
pictures of dioramas. Works best
when shooting from a high vantage
point. Press J to adjust settings
(0 93).
D Notes
• The built-in flash does not fire.
• The AF-assist illuminator does not light.
• Miniature effect movies play back at high speed.
• Sound is not recorded with movies.
7 Selective Color
All colors other than the selected
colors are recorded in black and
white. Press J to adjust settings
(0 94).
D Note
The built-in flash and optional flash units are disabled.
90 Shooting Controls
1 Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
2 High Key
Use with bright scenes to create
bright images that seem filled with
light.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
3 Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark,
low-key images with prominent
highlights.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Shooting Controls 91
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
A Special Effect Modes
• NEF (RAW) image quality options cannot be selected in 4, V, T, U,
5, 6, and 7 modes.
• In U and 6 modes, the shooting display refresh rate will drop.
❚❚ Adjusting U (Photo Illustration) Settings
To adjust line thickness, select U in
special effects mode and then press J.
• Press 4 to thin outlines or 2 to make
them thicker.
• Press J to save changes; the selected
effect will be applied during shooting.
❚❚ Adjusting 5 (Toy Camera Effect) Settings
To adjust settings, select 5 in special
effects mode and then press J.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting.
• Vividness: Press 2 for more saturation, 4
for less.
• Vignetting: Press 2 for more vignetting, 4 for less.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied
during shooting.
92 Shooting Controls
❚❚ Adjusting 6 (Miniature Effect) Settings
To adjust settings, select 6 in special effects mode and then
press J.
1 Position the focus point.
• Use the multi selector to position
the focus point in the area that you
want to be in focus.
• To check focus, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
2 Choose the orientation and size of
the area that will be in focus.
• Press J to view miniature effect
options.
• Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in
focus.
• Press 1 or 3 to choose the width of the area that will be in
focus.
3 Save changes.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied
during shooting.
A Movies
Miniature effect movies play back at high speed. For example,
approximately 15 minutes of footage shot with 1920 × 1080/30p
selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu
(0 254) will play back in about a minute.
Shooting Controls 93
❚❚ Adjusting 7 (Selective Color) Settings
To adjust settings, select 7 in special effects mode and then
press J.
1 Select colors.
Selected color
• Press J to view selective color
options.
• Frame an object of the desired color
in the white square at the center of
the display.
• To zoom in on the center of the
display for more precise color selection, tap the X button.
Tap the W button to zoom out.
• Press 1 to choose the color of the object in the white
square as one that will be recorded in color when
photographs are taken; the selected color will appear in the
first of the numbered color boxes.
• All colors other than those selected in the color boxes will
appear in black and white.
2 Choose the color range.
Color range
• Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in photographs; choose
from values between 1 and 7. The
higher the value, the wider the
range of colors that will be included;
the lower the value, the lower the range of colors that will
be included.
94 Shooting Controls
3 Select additional colors.
• To select additional colors, rotate
the main command dial to highlight
another of the numbered color
boxes and repeat Steps 1 and 2.
• Up to 3 colors can be selected.
• To deselect the highlighted color, press O.
• To remove all colors, press and hold O. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; select Yes.
4 Save changes.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied
during shooting.
D Note: Selective Color
• The camera may have difficulty detecting some colors. Saturated
colors are recommended.
• Higher values for color range may include hues from other colors.
Shooting Controls 95
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button
Hold the S button and rotate the main
command dial to adjust the camera’s
sensitivity to light according to the
amount of light available. The current
setting is shown in the shooting display.
Choose from settings of from ISO 100 to
ISO 51200; settings about 1 and 2 EV
above 51200 are also available for special
situations. h mode and all q modes
apart from 4 offer an additional ISO-A
(auto) option.
S button
Main command dial
D ISO Sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an
exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the
more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings of Hi 1
and Hi 2.
D Hi 1 and Hi 2
Hi 1 and Hi 2 correspond respectively to ISO sensitivities 1 and 2 EV
over the highest numerical value. Hi 1 is equivalent to ISO 102400, Hi 2
to ISO 204800.
96 Shooting Controls
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
In modes P, S, A, and M, auto ISO
Sub-command dial
sensitivity control can be enabled or
disabled by holding the S button and
rotating the sub-command dial. When
auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,
ISO sensitivity will automatically be
adjusted if optimal exposure cannot be
achieved at the value selected with the
S button and main command dial. To
prevent ISO sensitivity going too high,
S button
you can choose an upper limit of from
ISO 200 to Hi 2 using the ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity item in the photo shooting
menu.
When auto ISO sensitivity control is
enabled, the shooting display will show
ISO AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from
the value selected by the user, the
altered value is shown in the display.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for
Maximum sensitivity when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,
the value selected by the user will be used instead. When a flash is
used, shutter speed will be restricted to values between the speed
selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) and the speed
selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed).
Shooting Controls 97
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button
In modes other than b, exposure compensation can be used to
alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making
pictures brighter or darker. Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) for photographs, or
between −3 and +3 EV for movies. By default, adjustments to
exposure compensation are made in increments of 1/3 EV. This
can be changed to 1/2 EV using Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for
exposure cntrl). In general, positive values make the subject
brighter while negative values make it darker.
−1 EV
No exposure
compensation
To choose a value for exposure
compensation, press the E button and
rotate a command dial until the desired
value is displayed.
+1 EV
Subcommand
dial
E button
Main command dial
98 Shooting Controls
At values other than ±0.0, the camera displays a E icon (movie
mode) or a E icon and the exposure indicator (photo mode)
after you release the E button. The current value for exposure
compensation can be confirmed by pressing the E button.
Monitor
Viewfinder
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0. Except in h and q modes, exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in h
and q modes, exposure compensation will be reset when
another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ).
D Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. The exposure
indicator and the current value for exposure compensation can be
displayed by pressing the E button.
D Flash Photography
When the built-in flash or an optional flash unit is used, exposure
compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering the
brightness of both the main subject and the background. Custom
Setting e3 (Exposure comp. for flash) can be used to restrict the
effects of exposure compensation to the background only.
Shooting Controls 99
The A (L) Button
Press the A (L) button to lock focus
and exposure.
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Pressing the A (L) button locks exposure at the current
setting. AE lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a
subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the final
composition, and is particularly effective with spot or centerweighted metering.
Focus Lock
Press the A (L) button to lock focus on the current subject
when AF-C is selected for focus mode. When using focus lock,
choose an AF-area mode other than auto-area AF.
100 Shooting Controls
❚❚ Locking Focus and Exposure
Follow the steps below to use focus and exposure lock.
1 Set focus and exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
2 Lock focus and exposure.
Shutter-release button
With the shutter-release button
pressed halfway, press the A (L)
button to lock both focus and
exposure (an AE-L icon will be
displayed).
A (L) button
Shooting Controls 101
3 Recompose the photograph and
shoot.
Focus will remain locked between
shots if you keep the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (AF-S) or keep
the A (L) button pressed, allowing
several photographs in succession to
be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
D AF-S
When AF-S is selected for focus mode, or if the camera is shooting using
AF-S when AF-A is selected for focus mode, the focus will lock while the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus will also lock while the
A (L) button is pressed).
D Using the Shutter-Release Button for Exposure Lock
If On (half press) is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release
button AE-L), exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
102 Shooting Controls
The Built-In Flash
You’ll find that the built-in flash enhances the photographic
experience in a variety of situations, including when lighting is
poor or when you need to fill in shadows and backlit subjects.
Before using the built-in flash, raise it by sliding the flash pop-up
control.
1 Slide the flash pop-up control to
raise the built-in flash.
2 Choose a flash mode.
Select Flash mode in the i or photo
shooting menu and choose a flash
mode.
3 Take a picture after pressing the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
Shooting Controls 103
Flash Modes
Use the Flash mode option in the i or photo shooting menu to
choose the effect produced by the flash. The options available
vary with the shooting mode selected.
Option
Description
Fill flash (front-curtain sync): The flash fires with every
I
shot.
Red-eye reduction: Use for portraits. The red-eye
J reduction lamp lights before the flash fires to help
reduce “red-eye”.
Slow sync: As for “fill flash”, except that shutter speed
L slows automatically to capture background lighting
at night or under low light.
Slow sync + red-eye: Use for portraits or similar shots
taken against a night or evening backdrop. In
K addition to performing red-eye reduction, the
camera uses slow shutter speeds to capture
background lighting.
Rear-curtain sync: Normally the flash fires as the
shutter opens (front-curtain sync); in rear-curtain
M
sync, the flash fires just before the shutter closes.
Slow sync is automatically enabled in modes P and A.
Available in
P, S, A, M
P, S, A, M
P, A
P, A
P, S, A, M
b, k, p,
Auto: The flash fires automatically as required when n, s, f,
X
lighting is poor or the subject is backlit.
V, T, U,
5
b, k, p,
Auto + red-eye reduction: As for “red-eye reduction”,
n, s, f,
s
except that the flash fires only as required.
V, T, U,
5
104 Shooting Controls
Option
Description
Available in
Auto slow sync: As for “slow sync”, except that the flash
t
o
fires only as required.
Auto slow sync + red-eye: As for “slow-sync + red-eye”,
u
o
except that the flash fires only as required.
b, P, S, A,
M, k, p,
s Flash off: The flash does not fire.
n, o, s,
f, V, T,
U, 5
D Lowering the Built-In Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
D Using the Built-In Flash
• Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
• If the built-in flash is used with continuous low-speed or continuous
high-speed selected for release mode, only one picture will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Selecting continuous
high-speed (extended) enables burst photography and disables the
built-in flash.
• The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
Shooting Controls 105
D Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-In Flash
Shutter speed can be set as follows when the built-in-flash unit is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
b, p, n, s, f, 0, V, T, U, 5 Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)
k
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/30 s)
o
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–2 s)
P, A
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s) *
1/200 s–30 s
S
1/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time
M
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, rear-curtain sync, or slow sync with redeye reduction is selected for flash mode.
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 25600 51200 m
ft
1.4 2 2.8 4 5.6 8
11
16
22
32 0.7–5.0 2 ft 4 in.–16 ft 5 in.
2 2.8 4 5.6 8
11 16
22
32
— 0.6–3.5 2 ft–11 ft 6 in.
2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 22
32
—
— 0.6–2.5 2 ft–8 ft 3 in.
4 5.6 8 11 16 22 32 —
—
— 0.6–1.8 2 ft–5 ft 11 in.
5.6 8 11 16 22 32 — —
—
— 0.6–1.3 2 ft–4 ft 3 in.
8 11 16 22 32 — — —
—
— 0.6–0.9
2 ft–3 ft
* The flash has a minimum range of about 0.6 m (2 ft).
106 Shooting Controls
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to
the background. By default, adjustments to exposure
compensation are made in increments of 1/3 EV. This can be
changed to 1/2 EV using Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for
exposure cntrl). Flash output can be increased to make the
main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent unwanted
highlights or reflections. In general, choose positive values to
make the main subject brighter, negative values to make it
darker.
To choose a value for flash
compensation, use the Flash
compensation item in the photo
shooting menu. At values other than
±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the
shooting display.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
Shooting Controls 107
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring
that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the
subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output
is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and
aperture. FV lock is not available in b, h, and q modes.
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Assign FV lock to a control using
Custom Setting f2 (Custom controls
(shooting)).
2 Raise the flash.
Slide the flash pop-up control to raise the built-in flash.
3 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
108 Shooting Controls
4 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready
indicator (c) appears in the camera
display, press the control selected in
Step 1. The flash unit will emit a
monitor pre-flash to determine the
appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this
level and FV lock icon (r) will appear in the camera display.
5 Recompose the photograph.
Flash output will remain locked at the
value metered in Step 4.
6 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
7 Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm
that the FV lock icon (r) is no longer displayed.
A Optional Flash Units
Turn the flash unit on and select TTL for Flash control > Flash control
mode (external) (SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) or set the flash control
mode to TTL, monitor pre-flash qA, or monitor pre-flash A (other flash
units; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details).
Shooting Controls 109
The i Menu
Pressing the i button displays the i menu: a menu of
frequently-used settings for the current mode.
Using the i Menu
Press the i button to display the i menu.
Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view
options, then highlight an option and press J to select it and
return to the i menu (to exit to the previous display without
changing settings, press the i button).
A The Command Dials
You can also adjust settings for highlighted
items by rotating the main command dial to
choose an option and then pressing J (suboptions, if available, can be selected by
rotating the sub-command dial; in some
cases, the same options can be selected
using either dial). The current option will
also be selected if you highlight another item with the multi selector or
press the shutter-release button halfway.
110 The i Menu
The Photo-Mode i Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for
photo mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
Set Picture Control......................112 7 Wi-Fi connection......................... 128
White balance..............................116 8 Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
Image quality...............................122 9 Release mode .............................. 131
Image size.....................................124 10 Optical VR..................................... 135
Flash mode...................................125 11 AF-area mode.............................. 136
Metering .......................................127 12 Focus mode.................................. 136
The i Menu 111
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Option
n
Q
R
S
T
o
p
q
k01–
k20
Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the Standard Picture Control.
The complexions of portrait subjects will appear
Auto
softer, and such elements as the foliage and sky
in outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures
taken with the Standard Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.
Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose
Neutral
for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint
Vivid
effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture
Portrait
and a rounded feel.
Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,
from highlights to shadows. Choose for
Flat
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Choose from the following Picture Controls,
each a unique combination of hue, tone,
saturation, and other settings tuned for a
Creative Picture particular effect: Dream, Morning, Pop,
Control
Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached,
Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue,
Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, and
Carbon.
112 The i Menu
To view Picture Control settings,
highlight a Picture Control and press 3.
Changes to settings can be previewed in
the display (0 114).
The current Picture Control is indicated
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
The i Menu 113
❚❚ Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be modified to suit
the scene or the photographer’s creative
intent. Highlight Set Picture Control in
the i menu and press J to display the
Picture Control list, then highlight a
Picture Control and press 3 to display
Picture Control settings. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or
rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of
0.25 (the options available vary with the Picture Control
selected). Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
After adjusting settings to your
satisfaction, press J to put the changes
into effect and return to the i menu.
Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“U”).
D Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting.
D “A” (Auto)
Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the
camera adjust the setting automatically. Results vary with exposure
and the position of the subject in the frame.
A The “n Auto“ Picture Control
If n Auto is selected for Set Picture
Control, settings can be adjusted in the
range A−2 to A+2.
114 The i Menu
The following settings are available:
Option
Effect level
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture Control.
Quickly adjust levels for balanced Sharpening, Midrange sharpening, and Clarity. You can also make
individual adjustments to the following parameters:
• Sharpening: Control the sharpness of details and
outlines.
• Mid-range sharpening: Adjust sharpness according to
the fineness of the patterns and lines in mid-tones
affected by Sharpening and Clarity.
• Clarity: Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of
thicker outlines without affecting brightness or
dynamic range.
Adjust contrast.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
highlights or shadows.
Control the vividness of colors.
Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
pictures.
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures. Pressing
3 when an option other than B&W (black-and-white) is
selected displays saturation options.
Quick sharp
Sharpening
Mid-range
sharpening
Clarity
Contrast
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
Filter effects
Toning
Toning
(Creative
Picture
Control)
Adjust the shade of color used for Creative Picture
Controls.
D Filter Effects
Choose from the following:
Mode
Y (yellow)
O (orange)
R (red)
G (green)
Setting
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness
of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than
yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Green softens skin tones and can be used for portraits.
The i Menu 115
White Balance
Adjust white balance (for more information, see “White Balance”,
0 63).
Option
4 Auto
Keep white (reduce warm colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
Keep warm lighting colors
D Natural light auto
H
G
M
J
Direct sunlight
Cloudy
Shade
Incandescent
Option
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp. mercury-vapor
5 Flash
K Choose color temperature
L Preset manual
Pressing 3 when Auto or Fluorescent is
highlighted displays sub-options for the
highlighted item.
The current white balance option is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
116 The i Menu
❚❚ Fine-Tuning White Balance
Selecting White balance in the i menu
displays a list of white balance options. If
an option other than Choose color
temperature is highlighted, fine-tuning
options can be displayed by pressing 3.
Any changes to fine-tuning options can
be previewed in the display.
Increase green
Increase blue
Increase amber
Increase magenta
Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to finetune white balance. Press J to save settings and return to the i
menu.
An asterisk (“U”) next to the white
balance icon in the shooting display
indicates that fine-tuning is in effect.
The i Menu 117
❚❚ Choosing a Color Temperature
Selecting White balance in the i menu displays a list of white
balance options. When Choose color temperature is
highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by
pressing 3.
Value for
Amber–Blue axis
Value for
Green–Magenta axis
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the Amber–Blue or Green–
Magenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to save
settings and return to the i menu. If a value other than zero is
selected for the Green–Magenta axis, an asterisk (“U“) will be
displayed next to the white balance icon.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent
lighting. Choose I (Fluorescent) for fluorescent light sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
118 The i Menu
❚❚ Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall up to six custom white
balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to
compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Follow the
steps below to measure a value for preset manual white balance.
1 Display white balance presets.
Highlight Preset manual in the i
menu white balance display and
press 3 to display a list of white
balance presets.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired white balance
preset (d-1 to d-6) and press J to
select the highlighted preset and
return to the i menu.
D Protected Presets
Presets indicated by a g icon are
protected and cannot be changed.
3 Select direct measurement mode.
Highlight White balance in the i
menu and press and hold J until the
L icon in the shooting display starts
to flash and the white balance target
(r) appears in the center of the
frame.
The i Menu 119
4 Measure white balance.
To measure white balance, tap a
white or gray object, or use the multi
selector to position the r over a
white or gray area of the display and
either press J or press the shutterrelease button all the way down (note that the r cannot be
repositioned when the built-in flash is enabled or an optional
flash unit is attached, in which case you will need to measure
white balance with a white or gray object positioned in the
center of the frame).
If the camera is unable to measure
white balance, a message will be
displayed. Try measuring white
balance again with a different target.
5 Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
120 The i Menu
D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while HDR or
multiple exposure shooting is in progress.
D Direct Measurement Mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in
the time selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby
timer.
D Managing Presets
The White balance > Preset manual option in the photo shooting
menu can be used to copy white balance from an existing photograph
to a selected preset, add comments, or protect presets.
D Preset Manual: Selecting a Preset
To choose a preset, select White balance >
Preset manual in the photo shooting
menu, then highlight a preset and press J.
If no value currently exists for the selected
preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K,
the same as Direct sunlight.
The i Menu 121
Image Quality
Choose a file format for photographs.
Option
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
Description
Record two copies of each photo: an NEF
(RAW) image and a JPEG copy. Only the JPEG
copy is displayed during playback, but
deleting the JPEG copy also deletes the NEF
(RAW) image. The NEF (RAW) image can only
be viewed using a computer.
Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
Record photos in JPEG format. Compression
increases and file size decreases as quality
progresses from “fine” through “normal” to
“basic”.
The option currently selected is shown in
the display during shooting.
122 The i Menu
A NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) image files (extension “*.nef”) contain the raw image data
output from the image sensor. Using Nikon’s ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D software, you can adjust and re-adjust settings such as
exposure compensation and white balance as often as you please
without degrading image quality, making this format ideal for photos
that will be processed in multiple different ways. ViewNX-i and
Capture NX-D are available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download
Center.
The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as
JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. You can save NEF (RAW)
images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D
computer applications or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
camera retouch menu.
The i Menu 123
Image Size
Choose the size at which photographs are recorded.
The option currently selected is shown
in the display during shooting.
The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels vary with the
option selected for Choose image area in the photo shooting
menu.
Image area
DX (24 × 16)
Large
5568 × 3712
Image size
Medium
4176 × 2784
Small
2784 × 1856
1 : 1 (16 × 16)
3712 × 3712
2784 × 2784
1856 × 1856
16 : 9 (24 × 14)
5568 × 3128
4176 × 2344
2784 × 1560
124 The i Menu
Flash Mode
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash. The options available
depend on the mode selected with the mode dial.
Option
I Fill flash
J Red-eye
Available in
P, S, A, M
Option
Auto + red-eye
s reduction
reduction
L Slow sync
K Slow sync +
M
red-eye
Rear-curtain
sync
X Auto
t Auto slow sync
P, A
Auto slow sync +
u red-eye
P, S, A, M
b, k, p, n,
s, f, V, T,
U, 5
s Flash off
Available in
b, k, p, n,
s, f, V, T,
U, 5
o
o
b, P, S, A, M,
k, p, n, o,
s, f, V, T,
U, 5
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
The i Menu 125
A Flash Modes Available with Optional Flash Units
The flash modes available when an optional flash unit is attached vary
with the mode selected with the mode dial.
Option
I
Fill flash
J
Red-eye reduction
L
K
M
X
s
t
u
s
Slow sync
Slow sync + red-eye
Rear-curtain sync
Auto
Auto + red-eye reduction
Auto slow sync
Auto slow sync + red-eye
Flash off
126 The i Menu
Available in
b, P, S, A, M, k, l, p, m, n, r, s,
t, d, e, f, g, j, z, V, T, U, 5,
6, 1, 2, 3
b, P, S, A, M, k, l, p, m, n, r, s,
t, d, e, f, g, j, z, V, T, U, 5,
6, 1, 2, 3
P, A, o
P, A, o
P, S, A, M
—
—
—
—
b, P, S, A, M
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option
L
M
N
t
Description
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and
sets exposure according to tone distribution,
Matrix metering
color, composition, and distance for results close
to those seen by the naked eye.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns
the greatest weight to an area in the center of the
frame, the size of which can be chosen using
Center-weighted
Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This
metering
is the classic meter for portraits and is also
recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
The camera meters a 3.5 mm circle (equivalent to
approximately 2.5% of the frame) centered on the
current focus point, making it possible to meter
off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the
Spot metering
camera will instead meter the center focus point).
Spot metering ensures that the subject will be
correctly exposed, even when the background is
much brighter or darker.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to
Highlighthighlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail
weighted
in highlights, for example when photographing
metering
spotlit performers on-stage.
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
The i Menu 127
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless
connections to computers or between the camera and
smartphones or tablets (smart devices) running the SnapBridge
app.
The camera displays a Wi-Fi icon when
Wi-Fi is enabled.
To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight Wi-Fi connection in the i menu and
press J. If Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a Close Wi-Fi connection
prompt will be displayed; press J to end the connection.
128 The i Menu
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for highcontrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used
with matrix metering.
Off
Option
Y Auto
Z
P
Q
R
c
Y Auto
Description
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in
response to shooting conditions (in mode M, however,
Y Auto is equivalent to Q Normal).
Extra high
High
Normal
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed
from Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal, and
R Low.
Low
Off
Active D-Lighting off.
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
The i Menu 129
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photos
taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some
subjects. Active D-Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1
and Hi 2), including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity
control.
130 The i Menu
Release Mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down.
Option
U Single frame
V Continuous L
W Continuous H
X Continuous H
(extended)
E Self-timer
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
camera records 1–4 frames per second. The frame
rate can be chosen by rotating the sub-command
dial when Continuous L is highlighted in the
release-mode menu.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
camera records up to about 5 frames per second.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
camera records up to about 11 frames per second.
The built-in flash and optional flash units cannot be
used. Flicker reduction has no effect.
Take pictures with the self-timer (0 134).
Pressing 3 when Continuous L is
highlighted displays frame advance rate
options.
The current release mode is shown by an
icon in the shooting display.
The i Menu 131
D The Shooting Display
In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the
display is updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.
D Frame Advance Rate
Frame advance rate varies with camera settings. The approximate
maximum rates at different settings are given in the table below.
Silent photography
Image quality
Bit depth
Off
On
JPEG
—
Continuous L
12
User-selected
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
14
JPEG
—
4.5 fps
Continuous H
12
5 fps
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
14
4 fps
JPEG
—
11 fps *
11 fps
Continuous H
12
NEF (RAW)/
(extended)
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
14
9 fps
8.5 fps
* 10 fps when Electronic front-curtain shutter is selected for Custom Setting d4
(Shutter type).
Release mode
D Continuous H (Extended)
Depending on camera settings, exposure may vary erratically during
each burst. This can be prevented by locking exposure (0 101).
132 The i Menu
D The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory
buffer for temporary storage, allowing
shooting to continue while photographs are
being saved to the memory card. The
approximate number of images that can be
stored in the buffer at current settings is
shown in the exposure-count displays while
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or
remove the battery until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is
switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off
until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is
exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will
be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
The i Menu 133
❚❚ The Self-Timer
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button starts a
timer, and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1 Select Release mode in the i menu,
highlight Self-timer, and press 3.
2 Choose the self-timer release delay
and number of shots.
Press J when settings complete.
3 Frame the photograph and focus.
In release-priority focus modes,
including AF-S, the timer will not start
unless the camera is able to focus.
4 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down to start the timer. A E
icon will appear in the display and the
self-timer lamp will start to flash,
stopping two seconds before the
photograph is taken.
D Taking Multiple Shots
Use Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) to choose the number of shots
taken, and the interval between the shots taken, when the self-timer
finishes counting down.
134 The i Menu
Optical VR
Choose whether to enable optical vibration reduction. The
options available vary with the lens.
C
D
E
Option
Description
Normal
Choose for enhanced optical vibration reduction
(VR enabled) when photographing static subjects.
Choose when photographing athletes and other
Sport
subjects that are moving rapidly and
unpredictably.
Off
Optical vibration reduction off.
Options other than Off are shown by an
icon in the display during shooting.
D Optical VR
Optical VR may be unavailable with some lenses. When using
vibration reduction, wait for the image in the display to stabilize before
shooting. With some lenses, the image in the display may also jiggle
after the shutter is released; this is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Normal or Sport is recommended for panning shots. In Normal and
Sport modes, optical vibration reduction applies only to motion that is
not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example,
optical vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake).
The i Menu 135
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point
for autofocus. For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (0 54).
Option
Option
3 Pinpoint AF
d Single-point AF
e Dynamic-area AF
f Wide-area AF (S)
g Wide-area AF (L)
h Auto-area AF
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 51).
Option
AF mode auto-switch
AF-A
AF-S Single AF
Option
Continuous AF
AF-C
MF Manual focus
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
136 The i Menu
The Movie-Mode i Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for
movie mode.
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
1 Set Picture Control......................138 7 Wi-Fi connection......................... 143
2 White balance..............................138 8 Active D-Lighting ....................... 143
3 Frame size and rate/
9 Electronic VR................................ 143
image quality .............................139 10 Optical VR..................................... 144
4 Microphone sensitivity..............141 11 AF-area mode.............................. 144
5 Wind noise reduction ................142 12 Focus mode.................................. 144
6 Metering .......................................143
A “Same as Photo Settings”
If Same as photo settings is selected for
Set Picture Control, White balance,
Active D-Lighting, or Optical VR in the
movie shooting menu, a h icon will
appear at the top left corner of the i menu,
indicating that the options selected for
these settings in photo mode also apply in
movie mode and vice versa.
The i Menu 137
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movie recording. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” (0 112).
White Balance
Adjust white balance for movie recording. For more information,
see “White Balance” (0 63, 116).
138 The i Menu
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality
Select the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. You can
also choose from two Movie quality options: High quality
(indicated by frame size/rate icons with “m”) and Normal.
Together, these options determine the maximum bit rate, as
shown in the following table.
r
s
t
w
x
y/y
z/z
1/1
2/2
3/3
A
B
C
Max. bit rate (Mbps)
Max.
recording
High
time
quality Normal
Frame size/frame rate 1
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p
144
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p
1920 × 1080; 120p
—2
3
1920 × 1080; 100p 3
29 min.
59 s 4
1920 × 1080; 60p
1920 × 1080; 50p
56
28
28
14
1920 × 1080; 30p
1920 × 1080; 25p
1920 × 1080; 24p
1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)
3
36
—2
3 min.
29
1 Actual frame rates for values listed as 120p, 60p, 30p, and 24p are respectively 119.88 fps,
59.94 fps, 29.97 fps, and 23.976 fps.
2 Movie quality fixed at High quality.
3 The following cannot be used:
- Face detection (auto-area AF selected for AF-area mode)
- Flicker reduction
- Electronic VR
4 Each movie may be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each. The number of files and the
length of each file vary with the options selected for Frame size/frame rate and
Movie quality. Movies recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however
be recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity over 32 GB.
The i Menu 139
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display.
❚❚ Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select a “slow-motion”
option for Frame size/frame rate. Slow-motion movies are
recorded at 4 or 5 times the rated speed and play back at the
rated speed. Movies shot at 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slowmotion), for example, are recorded at a frame rate of roughly
120 fps and play back at around 30 fps, meaning that 10 seconds
recording produces about 40 seconds of footage.
Approximately 10 s
Recording
Playback
Approximately 40 s
Recording and playback speeds are shown below.
Frame size/frame rate
Recording speed
Normal
A 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 30p (29.97 fps)
25p (25 fps)
B 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 100p (100 fps)
C 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 24p (23.976 fps)
140 The i Menu
Microphone Sensitivity
Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity. Choose bA to adjust sensitivity
automatically or Microphone off to turn sound recording off or
adjust microphone sensitivity manually by choosing a value
between b1 and b20 (the higher the value, the higher the
sensitivity).
At settings other than bA, the option
currently selected is shown by an icon in
the display.
If the sound level is displayed in red, the
volume is too high. Reduce microphone
sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies recorded with the microphone off
are indicated by a 2 icon.
The i Menu 141
Wind Noise Reduction
Choose whether to enable wind-noise reduction during movie
recording.
Option
On
Off
Description
Enable the built-in microphone’s low-cut filter, reducing
noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone.
Note that other sounds may also be affected.
Disable wind noise reduction.
An icon appears in the shooting display
when On is selected for wind-noise
reduction.
Selecting On for Wind noise reduction has no effect on
optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for units
that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using
microphone controls.
142 The i Menu
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure in movie mode. For more
information, see “Metering” (0 127), but note that spot
metering is not available.
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Wi-Fi
Connection” (0 128).
Active D-Lighting
Choose an Active D-Lighting option for movie mode. For more
information, see “Active D-Lighting” (0 129). Note that if Same
as photo settings is selected for Active D-Lighting in the
movie shooting menu and Auto is selected in the photo
shooting menu, movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to
Normal.
Electronic VR
Select On to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie
mode. Electronic vibration reduction is not available in q
mode or at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080; 120p, 1920 × 1080;
100p, or 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion). Note that when electronic
vibration reduction is on, the angle of view will be reduced,
slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
An icon appears in the display while On
is selected.
The i Menu 143
Optical VR
Choose an optical vibration reduction option for movie mode.
For more information, see “Optical VR” (0 135).
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point when autofocus
is enabled in movie mode. For more information, see “AF-Area
Mode” (0 54).
Option
Option
d Single-point AF
f Wide-area AF (S)
g Wide-area AF (L)
h Auto-area AF
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 51).
Option
AF-S Single AF
AF-C Continuous AF
144 The i Menu
Option
AF-F Full-time AF
MF Manual focus
More About Playback
Learn more about viewing pictures and image information, the
playback i menu, playback zoom, and deleting pictures.
Viewing Pictures
Use the X and W buttons to cycle between full-frame and
thumbnail playback.
W
W
W
X
X
X
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most
recent picture full frame in the display.
Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2; to view additional
information on the current photograph,
press 1 or 3 or tap the DISP button
(0 147).
More About Playback 145
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, tap the W
button when a picture is displayed full
frame. The number of images displayed
increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time you
tap the W button and decreases each
time you tap the X button. Use the multi
selector to highlight images.
D Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(0 14).
D Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On
for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
D Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed after shooting (because the
camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated
automatically during image review). If On (monitor only) is selected,
photos will not be displayed in the viewfinder. In continuous release
modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph
in the current series displayed.
146 More About Playback
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 or tap the DISP button to cycle
through photo information as shown below.
File information
None (image only) 1
Exposure
data 1
Highlights 1
Overview data 1
Location
data 2
RGB histogram 1
Shooting data 1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for Playback display options
in the playback menu.
2 Displayed only if embedded in the picture (0 313).
More About Playback 147
File Information
12 3
4
5
13
12
11
10
8
9
7
Protect status .................................70
Retouch indicator....................... 323
Upload marking.......................... 157
Focus point *....................................54
Frame number/
total number of frames
6
6 Image quality .............................. 122
7 Image size .................................... 124
8 Image area ................................... 189
9 Time of recording....................... 303
10 Date of recording ....................... 303
11 Rating...............................................69
12 Folder name................................. 179
13 File name............................. 189, 254
* Displayed only if Focus point is selected
for Playback display options.
1
2
3
4
5
Exposure Data
1 2
3
4
148 More About Playback
5
1 Shooting mode..............................71
2 Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
3 Aperture ..........................................73
4 Exposure compensation..............98
5 ISO sensitivity * ...............................96
* Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode
P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control
on.
Highlights
1
1 Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed)
2 Folder number-frame
number ........................................ 185
2
RGB Histogram
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Folder number-frame
number ........................................ 185
2 White balance....................... 63, 116
Color temperature ............... 118
Preset manual ....................... 119
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 117
3 Histogram (RGB channel) ......... 150
4 Histogram (red channel)........... 150
5 Histogram (green channel) ...... 150
6 Histogram (blue channel)......... 150
More About Playback 149
D Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, tap X. Use the X and
W buttons to zoom in and out and scroll
the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the display.
D Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution, with pixel brightness (tone)
plotted on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical
axis. Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ
from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample
histograms are shown below:
If the image contains
objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
pictures in the display.
150 More About Playback
Shooting Data
Depending on settings at the time the picture was taken, there
may be up to five pages of shooting data: general, flash info,
Picture Control, advanced, and copyright information.
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 1 (General)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 Metering ....................................... 127
Shutter type ................................. 275
Shutter speed .........................72, 74
Aperture.......................................... 73
2 Shooting mode ............................. 71
ISO sensitivity 1 .............................. 96
3 Exposure compensation ............. 98
Optimal exposure tuning 2 ....... 271
4 Focal length
12 13
5 Lens data
6 Focus mode.................................... 51
AF-area mode................................ 54
7 Optical VR..................................... 135
8 White balance 3..................... 63, 116
9 White balance fine-tuning ....... 117
10 Color space................................... 205
11 Camera name
12 Image area ................................... 189
13 Folder number–frame
number ........................................ 185
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b4 (Fine-tune optimal exposure) has been set to a
value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using auto white balance.
More About Playback 151
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 2 (Flash Info)
14
15
16
17
14
15
16
17
Flash type
Remote flash control ................. 401
Flash mode .................................. 104
Flash control mode .................... 209
Flash compensation .................. 212
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 3 (Picture Control)
18 Picture Control 4 ................. 112, 200
18
4 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the picture was taken.
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 4 (Advanced)
19
20
21
22
23
24
152 More About Playback
19 High ISO noise reduction ......... 206
Long exposure noise
reduction..................................... 206
20 Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
21 HDR exposure differential ........ 230
HDR smoothing .......................... 230
22 Vignette control.......................... 207
23 Retouch history........................... 323
24 Image comment ......................... 310
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 5 (Copyright Information) 5
25
25 Name of photographer ............. 311
26 Copyright holder ........................ 311
26
5 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the photograph using the
Copyright information option in the setup menu.
Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the smart device (0 313). In the case of movies,
the data give the location at the start of recording.
More About Playback 153
Overview Data
1 2 345
16
6
17 18 19 20 21
7
8 29
28
27
9
15
26 25
22
23
24
14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/
total number of frames
2 Upload marking.......................... 157
3 Protect status..................................70
4 Retouch indicator ....................... 323
5 Camera name
6 Image comment indicator ....... 310
7 Location data indicator ............. 313
8 Histogram..................................... 150
9 Image quality .............................. 122
10 Image size..................................... 124
11 Image area ................................... 189
12 File name ............................. 189, 254
13 Time of recording ....................... 303
14 Date of recording........................ 303
15 Folder name................................. 179
16 Rating ...............................................69
Metering....................................... 127
Shooting mode..............................71
Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
Aperture ..........................................73
ISO sensitivity 1 ...............................96
Focal length
Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
Picture Control ................... 112, 200
Color space .................................. 205
Flash mode .................................. 104
White balance .......................63, 116
Color temperature ............... 118
Preset manual ....................... 119
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 117
28 Flash compensation .................. 212
Commander mode 2
29 Exposure compensation..............98
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 426).
154 More About Playback
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
The i Button: Playback
Pressing the i button during playback
zoom or full-frame or thumbnail
playback displays the i menu for
playback mode. Select options using the
multi selector and J button and press
the i button to exit the menu and return
to playback.
The options available in the playback
i menu vary with the type of picture.
Photos: Pressing the i button when a photo is selected displays
the options listed below.
• Quick crop (displayed only during playback zoom): Save a copy of the
current image cropped to the area visible in the display. This
option is not available when histograms are displayed.
• Rating: Rate the current picture (0 69).
• Select to send/deselect (smart device/PC): Select the current picture
for upload. The option displayed varies with the type of device
connected (0 157).
• Retouch: Use the options in the retouch menu (0 323) to create
a retouched copy of the current photograph.
• Choose folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder
and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect: Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (0 70).
• Unprotect all (not available during playback zoom): Remove protection
from all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback
folder in the playback menu.
More About Playback 155
Movies: The options below are available when a movie is selected.
• Rating: Rate the current picture (0 69).
• Select to send/deselect (PC): Select the current picture for upload.
The option displayed varies with the type of device connected
(0 157).
• Volume control: Adjust playback volume.
• Trim movie: Trim footage from the current movie and save the
edited copy in a new file (0 158).
• Choose folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder
and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect: Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (0 70).
• Unprotect all: Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu.
Movies (playback paused): The options below are available when
movie playback is paused.
• Choose start/end point: Trim footage from the current movie and
save the edited copy in a new file (0 158).
• Save current frame: Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0 161).
156 More About Playback
Select to Send/Deselect
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to
a smart device or computer. The i menu options used to select
pictures for upload vary with the type of device connected:
• Select to send/deselect (smart device): Displayed when the camera is
connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth or Wi-Fi
using the Connect to smart device item in the setup menu
(0 314).
• Select to send/deselect (PC): Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using the Connect
to PC item in the setup menu (0 316).
1 Select a picture.
Display a picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
select it in the thumbnail list.
2 Choose Select to send/deselect.
Press the i button to display the
i menu, then highlight Select to
send/deselect and press J. Pictures
selected for upload are indicated by a
W icon; to deselect, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
D Movies
Movies cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected
to a smart device via the SnapBridge app. The maximum file size for
movies uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
More About Playback 157
Choose Start/End Point
Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.
1 Display a movie full frame.
2 Pause the movie on the new
opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 48), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause, and pressing 4 or 2 or
Movie progress bar
rotating the main command dial to
locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the
movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause
playback when you reach the new opening frame.
3 Select Choose start/end point.
Press the i button to display the i
menu, then highlight Choose start/
end point and press J.
158 More About Playback
4 Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the main command dial; to skip
to the first or last frame, rotate the
sub-command dial).
6 Choose the end point.
Press the A (L) button to switch
from the start point (w) to the end
point (x) selection tool and then
select the closing frame as described
in Step 5. The frames after the
selected frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
A (L) button
End point
More About Playback 159
7 Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel
and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9 Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file. To
replace the original movie file with
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
D Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to
Step 7 without pressing the A (L) button in Step 6. To remove only
the closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing
frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the A (L) button in
Step 6.
D “Trim Movie”
Movies can also be edited using the Trim movie option in the retouch
menu.
160 More About Playback
Save Current Frame
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 48), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause. Pause the movie at the
frame you intend to copy.
2 Choose Save current frame.
Press the i button to display the i
menu, then highlight Save current
frame and press J to create a JPEG
copy of the current frame. The image
will be recorded at the dimensions
selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting
menu.
D Save Current Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save current frame option cannot
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information.
More About Playback 161
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in during full-frame playback, tap X or press J.
Navigation window
On-screen guide
While zoom is in effect, you can:
• Zoom in or out/view other areas of the image: Tap X or use stretch
gestures to zoom in to a maximum of approximately 21× for
large images, 16× for medium images, and 10× for small
images created with DX (24×16) selected for image area. Tap
W or use pinch gestures to zoom out. While the photo is
zoomed in, use the multi selector or slide a finger over the
screen to view areas not currently visible in the display. Keep
the multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of the
frame. A navigation window is displayed for a few seconds
after the zoom ratio is altered; the area currently visible in the
display is indicated by a yellow border. The bar under the
navigation window shows the zoom ratio, turning green at
1 : 1.
• Select faces: Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white
borders in the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command
dial or tap the on-screen guide to view other faces.
162 More About Playback
• View other images: Rotate the main command dial or tap the e or
f icons at the bottom of the display to view the same location
in other photos at the current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
• Return to shooting mode: Press the shutter-release button halfway
or press the K button to exit to shooting mode.
• Display the menus: Press G to view the menus.
More About Playback 163
Deleting Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture or use the
Delete option in the playback menu to delete multiple selected
pictures, all pictures taken on a selected date, or all pictures in
the current playback folder (protected pictures cannot be
deleted). Exercise caution when deleting pictures, as pictures
cannot be recovered once deleted.
During Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2 Press the O button again.
To delete the picture, press the O button again. To exit
without deleting the picture, press K.
164 More About Playback
The Playback Menu
The Delete item in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Q Selected
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates (0 166).
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback (0 179).
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Pictures
To delete multiple selected pictures, choose Selected and
follow the steps below.
1 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and tap the W button to
select or deselect. Selected pictures
are marked by a O icon (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, touch
and hold the X button). Repeat as
desired to select additional pictures.
2 Delete the selected pictures.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
More About Playback 165
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Pictures Taken on Selected Dates
To delete all unprotected pictures taken on selected dates,
choose Delete > Select date in the playback menu and follow
the steps below.
1 Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date. Selected dates are marked with
a M icon. Repeat as desired to select
additional dates; to deselect a date,
highlight it and press 2.
2 Delete the pictures taken on the
selected dates.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
166 More About Playback
Menu Guide
Learn more about camera menus.
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are
listed below.
Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Focus point
Exposure info
Highlights
RGB histogram
Shooting data
Overview
None (image only)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Image type
Frame interval
Rating
Default
—
All
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
On
Show next
On
Still images and movies
2s
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 167
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
Rename
Select folder by number
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Maximum sensitivity
Maximum sensitivity with c
Minimum shutter speed
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
168 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
—
NZ_50
100
DSC
DX (24×16)
JPEG normal
Large
14-bit
h, q (excluding 4): Auto
P, S, A, M: 100
On
51200
Same as without flash
Auto
Auto > Keep overall atmosphere
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Auto
—
sRGB
Auto
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Off
Matrix metering
Option
Flash control
Flash control mode (built-in)/Flash control
mode (external)
Wireless flash options
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Auto bracketing set
Number of shots
Increment
Multiple exposure *
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Overlay mode
Keep all exposures
Overlay shooting
Select first exposure (NEF)
Default
TTL
Off
b, k, p, n, f, V, T, 5: Auto
o: Auto slow sync
s: Auto + red-eye reduction
U: Flash off
P, S, A, M: Fill flash
0.0
m, f: Continuous H
Other modes: Single frame
U, 6: Single AF
Other modes: AF mode auto-switch
n, g, 0: Single-point AF
m, f: Dynamic-area AF
P, S, A, M, k, l, p, o, r, s, t,
d, e, j, z, 4, V, T, 5, 7, 1,
2, 3: Auto-area AF
(Varies with lens)
AE bracketing
0F
1.0
Off
2
Average
On
On
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 169
Option
Default
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode
Off
Exposure differential
Auto
Smoothing
Normal
Save individual images (NEF)
Off
Interval timer shooting
Choose start day/time
Now
Interval
1 minute
Intervals×shots/interval
0001×1
Exposure smoothing
Off
Silent photography
Off
Interval priority
Off
Starting storage folder
New folder
U
Reset file numbering
U
Time-lapse movie
Interval
5s
Shooting time
25 minutes
Exposure smoothing
On
Silent photography
Off
Frame size/frame rate
1920×1080; 60p
Interval priority
Off
Silent photography
Off
* Photo shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is in progress.
170 Menu Guide > Defaults
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity
Auto ISO control (mode M)
ISO sensitivity (mode M)
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
Default
—
DSC
1920×1080; 60p
Normal
MOV
25600
On
100
Same as photo settings
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Same as photo settings
—
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Auto
Matrix metering
m, f: Continuous
Other modes: Single frame
b, P, S, A, M, h: Full-time AF
q: Single AF
Menu Guide > Defaults 171
Option
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Default
n, g, 0: Single-point AF
m, f: Wide-area AF (S)
P, S, A, M, k, l, p, o, r, s, t,
d, e, j, z, 4, V, T, 5, 7, 1,
2, 3: Auto-area AF
Same as photo settings
Off
Auto
Disable
Wide range
Off
Custom Settings Menu Defaults
Option
Reset custom settings
a1 AF-C priority selection
a2 Auto-area AF face/eye detection
a3 Focus points used
a4 AF activation
a5 Focus point wrap-around
a6 Focus point options
Manual focus mode
Dynamic-area AF assist
a7 Low-light AF
a8 Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a9 Manual focus ring in AF mode
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
b2 Easy exposure compensation
b3 Center-weighted area
172 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
—
Focus
Face and eye detection on
All points
Shutter/AF-ON
No wrap
On
On
On
On
Enable
1/3 step
Off
ø 8 mm
Option
b4 Fine-tune optimal exposure
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Highlight-weighted metering
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Self-timer
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots
c3 Power off delay
Playback
Menus
Image review
Standby timer
d1 CL mode shooting speed
d2 Max. continuous release
d3 Exposure delay mode
d4 Shutter type
d5 Limit selectable image area
DX (24×16)
1:1 (16×16)
16:9 (24×14)
d6 File number sequence
d7 Apply settings to live view
d8 Framing grid display
d9 Peaking highlights
Peaking level
Peaking highlight color
d10 View all in continuous mode
Default
0
0
0
0
Off
10 s
1
0.5 s
10 s
1 min
4s
30 s
3 fps
100
Off
Auto
M (cannot be deselected)
M
M
On
On
Off
Off
Red
On
Menu Guide > Defaults 173
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
f1
Option
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Exposure comp. for flash
Auto c ISO sensitivity control
Bracketing order
Customize i menu
f2 Custom controls (shooting)
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button
Movie record button
Lens Fn button
Lens control ring
f3 Custom controls (playback)
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button
f4 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Menus and playback
Sub-dial frame advance
f5 Release button to use dial
f6 Reverse indicators
174 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
1/200 s
1/60 s
Entire frame
Subject and background
MTR > under > over
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Image quality; Image size; Flash mode;
Metering; Wi-Fi connection;
Active D-Lighting; Release mode;
Optical VR; AF-area mode; Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AE/AF lock
Select center focus point
None
AE/AF lock
(Varies with lens)
Protect
Zoom on/off
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off
Autofocus setting: Off
Off
10 frames
No
Option
g1 Customize i menu
g2 Custom controls
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button
Lens control ring
g3 AF speed
When to apply
g4 AF tracking sensitivity
g5 Highlight display
Display pattern
Highlight display threshold
Default
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Frame size and rate/Image quality;
Microphone sensitivity; Wind noise
reduction; Metering; Wi-Fi connection;
Active D-Lighting; Electronic VR; Optical
VR; AF-area mode; Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AE/AF lock
Select center focus point
(Varies with lens)
0
Always
4
Off
248
Menu Guide > Defaults 175
Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Default
—
—
—
(Default varies with country of
purchase)
Time zone and date
Time zone
Date and time
Date format
Daylight saving time
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
AF fine-tune (On/Off)
Saved value
Default
List saved values
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Attach comment
Copyright information
Attach copyright information
Beep options
Beep on/off
Volume
Pitch
176 Menu Guide > Defaults
(Default varies with country of
purchase)
(Default varies with country of
purchase)
(Default varies with country of
purchase)
Off
0
Auto
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Dark on light
Off
—
0
—
—
U
U
On
2
Low
Option
Touch controls
Enable/disable touch controls
Full-frame playback flicks
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Output resolution
Output range
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Select to send (Bluetooth)
Wi-Fi connection
Send while off
Connect to PC
Wi-Fi connection
Network settings
Options
MAC address
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Wireless remote connection
Save wireless remote controller
Delete wireless remote controller
Assign Fn1 button
Assign Fn2 button
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
Default
Enable
Left V Right
Enable
Auto
Auto
—
Disable
—
—
—
On
Disable
—
—
—
Disable
—
—
Same as camera K button
Same as camera G button
—
Enable
Release locked
—
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 177
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To view playback options, select the D
tab in the camera menus.
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
0
179
179
179
180
Option
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Rating
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Playback Menu Defaults” (0 167).
178 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
0
180
181
182
183
Delete
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Delete multiple images.
Option
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Q Selected
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback.
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose a folder for playback.
Option
Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be
visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using
(Folder name)
the Storage folder > Rename option in the photo
shooting menu (0 185).
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
Current
playback.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display. Highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect; items selected for display during full-frame playback are
indicated by L icons. To return to the playback menu, press J.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 179
Image Review
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose whether pictures are displayed automatically
immediately after shooting.
Option
Description
Pictures appear in the currently-selected display (monitor
On
or viewfinder) as they are taken.
Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the
On (monitor
monitor is used to frame shots. Pictures are not displayed
only)
in the viewfinder during shooting.
Off
Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
After Delete
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
S
T
U
Description
The following picture is displayed (if there is no
Show next following picture­—i.e., if the deleted image was the
last picture—the preceding picture will be displayed).
The preceding picture is displayed (if there is no
Show
preceding picture­—i.e., if the deleted image was the
previous
first picture—the next picture will be displayed).
If you were scrolling through pictures in the order
recorded, the following picture will be displayed as
Continue as described for Show next. If you were scrolling
before
through pictures in reverse order, the preceding
picture will be displayed as described for Show
previous.
180 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback. Note that
because the camera itself is already in the appropriate
orientation during shooting, images are not rotated
automatically during image review.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 181
Slide Show
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 179).
Option
Start
Description
Start slide show.
Choose the type of image displayed from Still images
and movies, Still images only, and Movies only, or
Image type select By rating to view only pictures with selected
ratings (highlight ratings and press 2 to select or
deselect).
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start
and press J. The following operations
can be performed while the show is in
progress:
• Skip back/skip ahead: Press 4 to return to
the previous frame, 2 to skip to the
next frame.
• View additional photo info: Press 1 or 3 to change or hide the
photo info displayed (still images only).
• Pause: Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight
Restart and press J.
• Adjust volume: Tap X during movie playback to increase the
volume, W to decrease.
• Exit to the playback menu: Press G to end the slide show and
return to the playback menu.
• Exit to playback mode: Press K to end the slide show and exit to
playback mode.
• Exit to shooting mode: Press the shutter-release button halfway to
return to shooting mode.
182 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
A dialog is displayed when the show
ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to
return to the playback menu.
Rating
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Rate pictures or mark them as
candidates for later deletion. Press 4 or
2 to highlight pictures and press 1 or 3
to choose a rating of from zero to five
stars, or select d to mark the picture as a
candidate for later deletion (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button).
Press J to exit when the operation is complete.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 183
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To view the photo shooting menu,
select the C tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
185
185
189
189
190
190
191
192
194
200
202
205
205
206
206
207
207
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range)
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse movie
Silent photography
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Photo Shooting Menu Defaults” (0 168).
184 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
0
207
208
208
209
211
212
212
212
212
212
213
223
230
235
245
252
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore photo shooting menu options to their
default values (0 168).
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Rename folders and select the folder in which subsequent
pictures will be stored.
Folder
Folder number
Folder name
Rename
Folders are identified by a 5-character folder name preceded by
a 3-digit folder number assigned automatically by the camera.
The default folder name is “NZ_50”; to change the name
assigned to new folders, select Rename. If desired, the default
name can be restored by pressing and holding the O button
while the keyboard is displayed. Existing folders cannot be
renamed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 185
D Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required. Tap letters on the
screen or use the multi selector to highlight characters and press J to
insert them at the current cursor position (note that if a character is
entered when the field is full, the last character in the field will be
deleted). To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
To move the cursor to a new position, tap the display or rotate the
main command dial. To complete entry and return to the previous
menu, tap X. To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Text display area
Keyboard area
186 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Select Folder by Number
To select folders by number or create a new folder with the
current folder name and a new folder number:
1 Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
2 Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and
press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder
with the selected number already
exists, one of the following icons will
be displayed:
• W: Folder is empty.
• X: Folder is partially full.
• Y: Folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 187
Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1 Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and press 2.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
Once the folder number has reached 999, no new folders will be
created (and the shutter release will consequently be disabled) after
the file number reaches 9999 or the number of files in the folder
reaches 5000, or if you attempt to record a movie when the camera
calculates that the number of files needed for a movie of maximum
length would result in the creation of a file numbered higher than 9999
or the folder holding over 5000 files. To continue shooting, create a
folder with a number less than 999 or try changing the options
selected for Frame size/frame rate and Movie quality.
D Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
188 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
File Naming
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
(0 205), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a threeletter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG” or “_DSC0002.JPG”). The
File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the
“DSC” portion of the file name as described in “Text Entry”
(0 186).
D Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG”
for JPEG images, “.MOV” for MOV movies, “.MP4” for MP4 movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG
images have the same file names but different extensions.
Choose Image Area
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:
Option
a DX (24×16)
m 1 : 1 (16×16)
Z 16 : 9 (24×14)
Description
Pictures are recorded using a 23.5 × 15.7 mm image
area (DX format).
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 189
Image Quality
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see
“Image Quality” (0 122).
Image Size
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the size, in pixels, of photographs recorded with the
camera. The dimensions vary with the option selected for image
area.
Option
Size (pixels)
Print size (cm/in.) *
Large
5568 × 3712
47.1 × 31.4/18.6 × 12.4
DX (24×16)
Medium
4176 × 2784
35.4 × 23.6/13.9 × 9.3
DX format
Small
2784 × 1856
23.6 × 15.7/9.3 × 6.2
Large
3712 × 3712
31.4 × 31.4/12.4 × 12.4
1 : 1 (16×16)
Medium
2784 × 2784
23.6 × 23.6/9.3 × 9.3
Small
1856 × 1856
15.7 × 15.7/6.2 × 6.2
Large
5568 × 3128
47.1 × 26.5/18.6 × 10.4
16 : 9 (24×14)
Medium
4176 × 2344
35.4 × 19.8/13.9 × 7.8
Small
2784 × 1560
23.6 × 13.2/9.3 × 5.2
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image area
190 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the bit depth at which NEF (RAW) photographs are
recorded.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit
depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 191
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
Option
Description
Choose from settings of ISO 100 to 51200, Hi 1, and Hi 2.
ISO sensitivity h and all q modes except 4 also offer an Auto
option.
If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO
sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at
the value selected for ISO sensitivity. The options listed
below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity
control.
• Maximum sensitivity: Choose an upper limit for ISO
Auto ISO
sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
sensitivity
• Maximum sensitivity with c: Choose the upper ISO
control
sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash
unit.
• Minimum shutter speed: Choose the shutter speed below
which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent
underexposure in modes P and A. Options range from
1/4000 s to 30 s. An Auto option is also available (0 193).
192 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
A “Minimum Shutter Speed” > “Auto”
If Auto is selected for Auto ISO sensitivity control > Minimum
shutter speed, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on the focal length of the lens. For example, the camera will
automatically select fast minimum shutter speeds to reduce the blur
that commonly occurs with telephoto lenses.
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned for faster or slower
minimum values by highlighting Auto and pressing 2; choosing fast
minimum shutter speeds when photographing fast-moving objects
reduces blur.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum
exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for
Maximum sensitivity.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 193
White Balance
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust white balance. For more
information, see the “White Balance”
sections in “Basic Settings” (0 63) and
“The i Menu” (0 116).
The White Balance Menu: Fine-Tuning
Fine-tuning is available via the camera menus. For more
information on fine-tuning, see “Fine-Tuning White Balance”
(0 117). For information on fine-tuning preset manual white
balance, see “Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance” (0 199).
1 Display fine-tuning options.
Go to White balance in the photo
shooting menu, highlight a white
balance option, and press 2.
194 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2 Fine-tune white balance.
Coordinates
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance. White balance can be
fine-tuned on the Amber–Blue axis in
steps of 0.5 and the Green–Magenta
axis in steps of 0.25. The horizontal
(Amber–Blue) axis corresponds to
Adjustment
color temperature, while the vertical
(Green–Magenta) axis has the similar
effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.
The horizontal axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about
5 mired, the vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse
density units.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to
the photo shooting menu. If white
balance has been fine-tuned, an
asterisk (“U”) will appear next to the
white balance icon in the shooting
display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 195
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make
photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
D “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
The White Balance Menu: Choosing a Color
Temperature
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance >
Choose color temperature option in the photo shooting menu.
Enter values for the amber–blue and green–magenta axes as
described below.
1 Select Choose color temperature.
Go to White balance in the photo shooting menu, highlight
Choose color temperature and press 2.
196 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2 Select values for amber–blue and green–magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the Amber–Blue or
Green–Magenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
Value for
Amber–Blue axis
Value for
Green–Magenta axis
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to
the photo shooting menu. If a value
other than zero is selected for the
Green–Magenta axis, an asterisk (“U”)
will appear next to the white balance
icon in the shooting display.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent
lighting. Choose I (Fluorescent) for fluorescent light sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 197
Preset Manual: Copying White Balance from a
Photograph
The Preset manual option in the white balance menu can be
used to copy a white balance value from an existing photograph.
For more information on preset manual white balance, see
“Preset Manual” (0 119).
1 Select Preset manual.
Go to White balance in the photo
shooting menu, highlight Preset
manual, and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1
to d-6) and tap X.
3 Choose Select image.
The preset manual white balance
menu will be displayed; highlight
Select image and press 2.
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view
the highlighted image full frame,
touch and hold the X button.
198 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
5 Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value from the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted
photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to
the comment for the selected preset.
D Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The current preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune in the preset manual
white balance menu and adjusting white
balance as described in “The White Balance
Menu: Fine-Tuning” (0 194).
D Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white-balance
preset, select Edit comment in the preset
manual white balance menu.
D Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset,
select Protect in the preset manual white
balance menu, then highlight On and press
J. Protected presets cannot be modified
and the Fine-tune and Edit comment
options cannot be used.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 199
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how new photos will be processed. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” (0 112).
Set Picture Control: Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to
suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
in the Picture Control list and press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
sub-command dial to choose a value
in increments of 0.25 (the options
available vary with the Picture Control selected). To quickly
adjust levels for balanced Sharpening, Mid-range
sharpening, and Clarity, highlight Quick sharp and press 4
or 2. Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted.
Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and return to the Picture Control list.
200 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Custom Picture Controls
Modifications to existing Picture Controls can be saved as custom
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
photo or movie shooting menu. Custom Picture Controls can be
copied to a memory card and used in compatible software or shared
among cameras of the same model.
D The i Menu
Modifying Picture Controls from the i menu
allows the effect to be previewed in the
display. Highlight Set Picture Control in the
i menu and press J, then press 4 and 2 to
choose a Picture Control and press 3 to
display Picture Control settings.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 201
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option
Save/edit
Rename
Delete
Load/save
Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing
preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
Rename custom Picture Controls.
Delete custom Picture Controls.
Use the following options to copy custom Picture
Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to
the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other
cameras or compatible software.
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through
C-9 on the camera and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture Controls
from the memory card.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9) from the camera to a selected destination
(1 through 99) on the memory card.
202 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 4 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
3 Edit the selected Picture Control.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the
O button. Press J when settings are
complete.
4 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 203
5 Name the Picture Control.
A text-entry dialog will be displayed. By default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to
choose a different name, rename the Picture Control as
described in “Text Entry” (0 186). Tap the keyboard selection
button to cycle through the upper-case, lower-case, and
symbol keyboards. Custom Picture Control names can be up
to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the
nineteenth will be deleted. When entry is complete, tap X to
add the new Picture Control to the Picture Control list.
Name area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
D Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
D The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
204 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Original
Picture Control icon
Color Space
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for general-purpose
printing and display, Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of
colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
D Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
D Color Space
ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D automatically select the correct color
space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results
cannot be guaranteed with third-party software.
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures
with natural contrast. For more information, see “Active
D-Lighting” (0 129).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 205
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots
or fog). The time required for processing
roughly doubles; during processing, the
message “Performing noise reduction“
will be displayed and pictures cannot be taken (if the camera is
turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed).
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise”.
Option
High/
Normal/
Low
Off
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly
in pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at
an amount as high as when Low is selected.
206 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vignette control reduces the drop in brightness that occurs at
the edges of the frame. Its effects vary from lens to lens and are
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
D Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness,
while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have
been modified from default settings may not produce the desired
effect. Take test shots and view the results in the display.
Diffraction Compensation
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high
f/-numbers).
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting
with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion
when shooting with long lenses (note that On may be selected
automatically with some lenses, in which case the Auto
distortion control option will be grayed out and unavailable).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 207
Flicker Reduction Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
When On is selected, the camera will time photographs to
reduce banding, areas of under- or over-exposure, or (in
photographs taken in continuous release modes) uneven
coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps (note that the frame rate
may drop while flicker reduction is in effect, and that the frame
rate may slow or become erratic during burst shooting).
D “Flicker Reduction Shooting” in the Photo Shooting Menu
Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not
be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark
backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and
other non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may
be a slight delay before the shutter is released. The desired results may
not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during
shooting.
Flicker detection will not take effect when Continuous H (extended)
is selected for release mode or silent photography, HDR, or exposure
delay mode is enabled.
Metering
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. For more
information, see “Metering” (0 127).
208 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flash Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust flash settings for the built-in flash, optional flash units,
and wireless flash photography.
• For information on using optional flash units for on-camera
flash photography, see “On-Camera Flash Photography”
(0 397).
• For information on using optional flash units for wireless flash
photography, see “Remote Flash Photography” (0 401).
Flash Control Mode (Built-in)
Choose the flash control mode for the
built-in flash.
• TTL: i-TTL mode. Flash level is adjusted
automatically in response to shooting
conditions.
• Manual: Choose the flash level (Manual
output amount) manually.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 209
A Flash Control Mode (External)
When an optional flash is attached and turned on, the Flash control
mode (built-in) option is replaced by Flash control mode (external).
A The Built-In Flash: Metering and Flash Control
The camera uses i-TTL balanced fill-flash flash control with matrix,
center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL fillflash flash control with spot metering. In i-TTL modes, flash output is
adjusted based on monitor preflashes emitted by the built-in flash
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash: The built-in flash emits a series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before the main flash.
The camera analyzes preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of
the frame and adjusts flash output for a natural balance between the
main subject and ambient background lighting.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash: Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the
frame to standard level; the brightness of the background is not
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the main
subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when
exposure compensation is used.
210 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless
control of multiple remote flash units.
This option is available only when an
SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the
camera.
Option
Y
Description
The remote flash units are controlled using lowOptical AWL intensity flashes emitted by the master flash
(0 402).
Off
Remote flash photography disabled.
Group Flash Options
Adjust settings for the flash units in each
group when using optional flash units
(0 401).
Flash Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash or optional flash
units mounted on the camera accessory shoe. For more
information, see “Flash Modes” (0 104).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 211
Flash Compensation
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust flash output for the built-in flash or optional flash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe to control the
brightness of the main subject relative to the background
(0 107). Flash output can be increased to make the main subject
appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or
reflections.
Release Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released.
For more information, see “Release Mode” (0 131).
Focus Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 51).
AF-Area Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.
For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (0 54).
Optical VR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable optical vibration reduction. For more
information, see “Optical VR” (0 135).
212 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Auto Bracketing
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vary exposure, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly
with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be
used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult
and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with
each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same
subject. The following options are available:
• Auto bracketing set: Choose the setting or settings bracketed
when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE bracketing
perform exposure bracketing, WB bracketing to perform
white-balance bracketing, or ADL bracketing to perform
bracketing using Active D-Lighting.
• Number of shots: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
• Increment: Choose the amount the selected settings vary with
each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
• Amount: Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot
(ADL bracketing only).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 213
Exposure Bracketing
Vary exposure over a series of photographs.
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
1 Select AE bracketing for Auto bracketing set.
The camera will display Number of shots and Increment
options.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
214 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3 Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing
increment. When 1/3 step is selected
for Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for
exposure cntrl), the size of the
increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV.
The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are
listed below.
“Number of
shots”
0F
+3F
−3F
+2F
−2F
3F
5F
7F
9F
Bracketing indicator
No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
0/+0.3/+0.7
3
0/–0.7/–0.3
2
0/+0.3
2
0/–0.3
3
0/–0.3/+0.3
5
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
7
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
9
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected
in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 215
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected; the
modified values for shutter speed and aperture
are shown in the display. Modifications to exposure are
added to those made with exposure compensation.
While bracketing is in effect, the display shows a bracketing
icon, a bracketing progress indicator, and the number of
shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot,
a segment will disappear from the indicator and the number
of shots remaining will be reduced by one.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
216 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Exposure Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is
selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for
optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity
control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then
bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 217
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each
with a different white balance.
1 Choose WB bracketing.
Select WB bracketing for Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
218 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3 Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing
increment. Each increment is roughly
equivalent to 5 mired. Choose from
increments of 1 (5 mired),
2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired). Higher B values correspond to
increased amounts of blue, higher A values to increased
amounts of amber. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1 are listed below.
“Number of
shots”
0F
B3F
A3F
B2F
A2F
3F
5F
Bracketing indicator
No. of
shots Increment
0
1
3
1B
3
1A
2
1B
2
1A
3
5
7F
7
9F
9
1A, 1B
Bracketing order
0
0/B1/B2
0/A2/A1
0/B1
0/A1
0/A1/B1
0/A2/A1/B1/B2
0/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3
0/A4/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3/B4
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 219
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number
of copies specified in the bracketing program, and
each copy will have a different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to the white
balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater
than the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release
will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory
card is inserted.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
D White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels
white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are
made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the bracketing
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
220 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
1 Choose ADL bracketing.
Select ADL bracketing for Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting
off and another at the value selected in Step 3. Choose three
to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active
D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and Normal (three shots), Off,
Low, Normal, and High (four shots), or Off, Low, Normal,
High, and Extra high (five shots). If you choose more than
two shots, proceed to Step 4.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
3 Choose a value for Active
D-Lighting.
Highlight Amount and press 4 or 2
to choose an option. The chosen
setting applies when 2F is selected for
Number of shots.
Bracketing
order
Amount
OFF L
Off/Low
OFF N
Off/Normal
OFF H
Off/High
OFF H+ Off/Extra high
OFF AUTO
Off/Auto
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 221
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-byshot according to the bracketing program
selected.
While bracketing is in effect, the
display shows an ADL bracketing
icon and the number of shots
remaining in the bracketing
sequence. After each shot, the
number of shots remaining will be
reduced by one.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
D ADL Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
222 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Multiple Exposure
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
The following options are available:
• Multiple exposure mode: Choose from On (series) (take a series of
multiple exposures, ending when Off is selected), On (single
photo) (take one multiple exposure), or Off (exit without
creating additional multiple exposures).
• Number of shots: Choose the number of exposures that will be
combined to form a single photograph.
• Overlay mode: Choose from the options below.
- Add: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is
not adjusted.
- Average: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is
divided by the total number of exposures (the gain for each
exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
- Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and
uses only the brightest.
+
- Darken: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and
uses only the darkest.
+
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 223
• Keep all exposures: Choose On to save the individual shots that
make up each multiple exposure, Off to discard the individual
shots and save only the multiple exposure.
• Overlay shooting: If On is selected, earlier exposures will be
superimposed on the view through the lens during shooting.
• Select first exposure (NEF): Choose the first exposure from the NEF
(RAW) images on the memory card.
Creating a Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to shoot a multiple exposure.
1 Select Multiple exposure.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode
and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to
choose the desired mode and press
J to select.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
224 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press
2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will be
combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
4 Choose the overlay mode.
Highlight Overlay mode and press
2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired mode and press J to select.
5 Choose whether to keep individual
exposures.
To choose whether to keep or delete
the individual shots that make up the
multiple exposure, highlight Keep all
exposures and press 2, then press 1
or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
6 Choose whether to view progress in
the display.
To choose whether earlier exposures
are superimposed over the view
through the lens as shooting
progresses, highlight Overlay
shooting and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired option and press J to select.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 225
7 Choose the first exposure.
To choose the first exposure from
existing NEF (RAW) photos, highlight
Select first exposure (NEF) and
press 2. Use the multi selector to
highlight the desired image and press
J to select (to view the highlighted image full screen, touch
and hold the X button).
8 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Continue shooting until all
exposures have been taken and the
final photograph has been recorded
(if you selected an existing NEF
(RAW) image as the first exposure in
Step 7, shooting will start from the
second exposure). If On (single
photo) was selected in Step 2,
multiple exposure shooting will end when the photo is
recorded; otherwise, you can continue taking multiple
exposures until multiple exposure shooting is turned off.
226 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Release Mode
In continuous release modes, the camera records all exposures in a
single burst. If On (series) is selected, a new multiple exposure will
start as each previous multiple exposure ends; if On (single photo) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first multiple
exposure is recorded. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically
record the number of exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the
option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots; the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom
Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other release
modes, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been
recorded.
D Image Quality
Multiple exposures shot with an NEF (RAW) option selected for image
quality will be recorded in JPEG fine format.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 227
The i Menu
The options listed below can be
accessed during multiple exposure
shooting by pressing the K button
followed by the i button. Highlight
items and press J to select.
• View progress: View a preview created
from the exposures recorded to the
current point.
• Retake last exposure: Retake the most
recent exposure.
• Save and exit: Create a multiple exposure
from the exposures taken to current
point.
• Discard and exit: Exit without recording a multiple exposure. If On
is selected for Keep all exposures, the individual exposures
will be kept.
D Multiple Exposure
Shooting may also end if camera settings are changed before the
exposure is complete. The shooting settings and photo info for
multiple exposure photographs are those for the first exposure.
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
D Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards cannot be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and cannot be
changed.
228 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have
been taken, select Off for Multiple
exposure mode or press the K button
followed by the i button and select
either Save and exit or Discard and
exit. If shooting ends or you select Save and exit before the
specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point. If Average is selected for Overlay mode,
gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually
recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if the
standby timer expires.
D The Standby Timer
Menus and playback can be used between exposures, but note that if
no operations are performed for about 40 seconds during playback or
90 seconds while menus are displayed, shooting will end and a
multiple exposure will be created from the exposures recorded to that
point. The time available to record the next exposure can be extended
by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) >
Playback and Menus.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 229
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (with spot or center-weighted
metering, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about
2 EV). It cannot be combined with some camera features,
including NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+ image quality settings, flash
photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, shutter speeds of
Bulb and Time, or interval timer, or time-lapse recording.
+
First exposure (darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
The following options are available:
• HDR mode: Choose from On (series) (take a series of HDR
photographs, ending when Off is selected), On (single photo)
(take one HDR photograph), and Off (exit without taking
additional HDR photographs).
• Exposure differential: Choose the difference in exposure between
the two shots that are combined to make an HDR photograph.
Choose larger values for high-contrast subjects, or select Auto
to let the camera adjust the exposure differential according to
the scene.
• Smoothing: Choose how much to smooth the boundaries
between the shots that make up each HDR photograph.
230 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Save individual images (NEF): Choose On to save each of the
individual shots used to create the HDR image. The photos are
saved as NEF (RAW) files regardless of the options selected for
image quality in the photo shooting menu.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 231
Taking HDR Photographs
Follow the steps below to shoot HDR photographs.
1 Select HDR (high dynamic range).
Highlight HDR (high dynamic
range) in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following and
press J.
• To take a series of HDR photographs,
select 0 On (series). HDR
shooting will continue until you
select Off for HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
232 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3 Choose the exposure differential.
To choose the difference in exposure
between the two shots, highlight
Exposure differential and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose higher values for highcontrast subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than
required may not produce the desired
results; if Auto is selected, the camera
will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.
4 Choose the amount of smoothing.
To choose how much the boundaries
between the two images are
smoothed, highlight Smoothing and
press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Higher values produce a smoother
composite image. Uneven shading
may be visible with some subjects.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 233
5 Choose whether to keep individual
exposures.
To choose whether to save the
individual NEF (RAW) images that
make up the HDR photograph,
highlight Save individual images
(NEF) and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired
option and press J to select.
6 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down. Regardless of the option
currently selected for release mode, only one photograph will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use
of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark
objects; this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of
smoothing.
234 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Interval Timer Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified
number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other
than Self-timer (E) when using the interval timer.
Selecting Interval timer shooting displays the options below.
• Start: Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s (Now
selected for Choose start day/time) or at a selected date and
time (Choose day/time). Shooting will continue at the
selected interval until all shots have been taken.
• Choose start day/time: Choose a start option. To start shooting
immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date
and time, select Choose day/time.
• Interval: Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds)
between shots.
• Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and the
number of shots per interval.
• Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust
exposure to match previous shot in modes other than M (note
that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto
ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject
brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations
in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the
interval between shots.
• Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during
shooting.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 235
• Interval priority: Select On to ensure that photos shot in modes P
and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that
photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, choose a focus
mode of MF or AF-C and check that the minimum shutter speed
chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity
control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval.
If AF-C is selected for focus mode, check that Release is chosen
for Custom Setting a1(AF-C priority selection).
• Starting storage folder: Highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect. Choose New folder to create a new folder for each
new sequence, Reset file numbering to reset file numbering
to 0001 when a new folder is created.
236 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Interval Timer Photography
D Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results. We recommend using a tripod
and selecting Off for Optical VR in the photo shooting menu. Before
choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time
and date. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before
use.
1 Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the photo shooting menu and press 2.
Interval timer shooting options will
be displayed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 237
2 Adjust interval timer settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Choose start day/time: Choose the starting date and time.
Highlight Choose start day/
time and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting
at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time, then
choose the date and time and press J.
• Interval: Choose the interval, in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Highlight Interval and press 2.
Choose an interval and press J.
238 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and
the number of shots per interval.
Highlight Intervals×shots/
interval and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals
and shots/interval and press J.
In single frame release mode, the photographs for each
interval will be taken at the rate for continuous high-speed
release mode. When silent photography is enabled, the
number of shots per interval is fixed at one.
• Exposure smoothing: Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Silent photography: Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 239
• Interval priority: Enable or disable Interval priority.
Highlight Interval priority and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Starting storage folder: Choose starting folder options.
Highlight Starting storage
folder and press 2.
Highlight options and press 2
to select or deselect; press J to
proceed.
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J. The first
series of shots will be taken at the
specified starting time, or after about
3 s if Now was selected for Choose
start day/time in Step 2. The display
turns off during shooting; shooting will continue at the
selected interval until all shots have been taken.
240 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the
memory card access lamp will flash.
If the display is turned on by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway, the
message “Interval timer shooting“ will be
displayed and the Q icon will flash.
Settings can be adjusted, the menus used,
and pictures played back while interval
timer photography is in progress. The
display will turn off automatically shortly before each interval. Note
that changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may
cause shooting to end.
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals as
follows:
• If Now is selected for Choose start day/time, interval timer
photography can be paused by pressing J (pressing J
between shots may have no effect if the time selected for
Interval is very short, in which case interval timer photography
can be paused by turning the camera off )
• If Choose day/time is selected for Choose start day/time,
interval timer photography can be paused by selecting
Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu,
highlighting Pause, and pressing J
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 241
❚❚ Resuming Interval Timer Photography
To resume shooting immediately, select Restart.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
To resume shooting at a specified time:
In the interval timer
menu, highlight
Choose day/time and
press 2.
Choose a starting date
and time and press J.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
Interval timer photography can be ended as follows:
• If Now is selected for Choose start day/time, interval timer
photography can be ended by pressing J between shots to
pause shooting and then highlighting Off in the Interval
timer shooting menu and pressing J (pressing J between
shots may have no effect if the time selected for Interval is
very short, in which case interval timer photography can be
paused by turning the camera off )
• If Choose day/time is selected for Choose start day/time,
interval timer photography can be paused by selecting
Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu,
highlighting Pause, and pressing J
242 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
❚❚ No Photograph
Photographs will not be taken at the selected interval if the
current interval ends before the photograph or photographs for
the previous interval have been taken or the memory card is full.
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting after deleting some pictures
or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
D Interval Timer Photography
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots and, if you are using a flash, the time needed for the
flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the number of photos taken
may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of intervals
multiplied by the number of shots per interval) or the flash may fire at
less than the power needed for full exposure. Interval timer
photography will not start if the interval is set to 00:00’0.5” and both
Silent photography and Interval priority are enabled. Interval timer
photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including movie recording, time-lapse movies, long time-exposures
(bulb or time photography), multiple exposure, and HDR (high
dynamic range). Note that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and
time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the next,
the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the
next may vary. If shooting cannot proceed or changes cannot be
applied at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of Bulb or
Time is currently selected in mode M, the interval is zero, or the start
time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed.
Interval timer shooting will pause when Self-timer (E) is selected for
release mode or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when
the camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without
ending interval timer photography). Pausing shooting does not affect
interval timer settings.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 243
D Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.
D Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in
the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of
shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing
is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will
take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of
copies specified in the bracketing program. Note that bracketing
cannot be used during interval timer photography when On is
selected for Interval priority.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Flicker reduction
244 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Time-Lapse Movie
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie.
Selecting Time-lapse movie displays the options below.
• Start: Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s
and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting
time.
• Interval: Choose the interval between shots in minutes and
seconds.
• Shooting time: Choose how long the camera will continue to take
pictures (hours and minutes).
• Exposure smoothing: Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in
exposure in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during
shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in
which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval
between shots.
• Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during
shooting.
• Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate for the final
movie.
• Interval priority: Select On to ensure that frames shot in modes P
and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that
photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, choose a focus
mode of MF or AF-C and check that the minimum shutter speed
chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity
control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval.
If AF-C is selected for focus mode, check that Release is chosen
for Custom Setting a1(AF-C priority selection).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 245
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
D Before Shooting
Before shooting a time-lapse movie, select Time zone and date in the
setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct
time and date, and then take a test shot at current settings and view
the results. Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop; to check
the composition, tap the X button in the Time-lapse movie display (to
return to the Time-lapse movie display, tap the W button). For
consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than
4 (auto) or D (natural light auto).
We recommend using a tripod and selecting Off for Optical VR in the
photo shooting menu. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be
sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery
before use.
1 Select Time-lapse movie.
Highlight Time-lapse movie in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
Time-lapse movie options will be
displayed.
246 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2 Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Interval: The interval (in minutes and seconds) should be
longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed.
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval and press J.
• Shooting time: The total shooting time (in hours and minutes)
can be up to 7 hours and 59 minutes.
Highlight Shooting time and
press 2.
Choose a shooting time and
press J.
• Exposure smoothing: Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 247
• Silent photography: Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate at which
the final movie will play back.
Highlight Frame size/
frame rate and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Interval priority: Enable or disable Interval priority.
Highlight Interval priority and
press 2.
248 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Highlight an option and
press J.
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3 s. The
display turns off and the camera takes
photographs at the selected interval
for the selected shooting time.
D During Shooting
During shooting, the memory card access lamp will light. Regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay, 0 273) >
Standby timer, the standby timer will not expire during shooting.
To end shooting (0 250) or view such
settings as exposure smoothing, the
interval, and the time remaining, press the
G button between shots (the time-lapse
movie dialog may not be displayed if the
interval is very short). Note that you cannot
adjust settings, play pictures back, or use
the menus while shooting is in progress.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 249
❚❚ Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J
between shots. You also have the option of pressing the G
button to display the Time-lapse movie menu, highlighting Off,
and pressing J. If, however, the time selected for Interval is very
short, pressing J between shots may have no effect or the
Time-lapse movie menu may not be displayed when the G
button is pressed, in which case you will need to turn the camera
off.
• When shooting ends, a movie will be created from the frames
shot to that point and the camera will exit to shooting mode.
Note that if the battery is removed or the memory card is
ejected, shooting ends (but no beep will sound) and no movie
will be recorded.
D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by
dividing the shooting time by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1.
The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for Frame size/frame rate.
A 48-frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be
about two seconds long. The maximum length for time-lapse movies
is 20 minutes.
Frame size/frame rate
Memory card indicator
Length recorded/
maximum length
250 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Time-Lapse Movies
Time-lapse cannot be combined with some camera features, including
movie recording, long time-exposures (bulb or time photography), the
self-timer, bracketing, HDR (high dynamic range), multiple exposure,
and interval timer photography. Active D-Lighting is disabled
automatically. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed
to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot,
the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next
shot may vary. Changes to settings will not be applied and shooting
will not begin if a time-lapse movie cannot be recorded at current
settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the interval or
shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than the shooting time).
Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed
or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames
shot to the point where shooting ended.
D Image Review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in
progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds
after each shot if On or On (monitor only) is selected for Image
review in the playback menu (the frame may not be displayed if the
interval is very short). Other playback operations cannot be performed
while the frame is displayed.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Flicker reduction
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 251
Silent Photography
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when
shooting landscapes and other static subjects (0 67). Use of a
tripod is recommended. Pictures are taken using the electronic
shutter, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d4
(Shutter type). Regardless of the option selected for Beep
options in the setup menu, a beep will not sound when the
camera focuses or the self-timer is counting down, and both the
flash and long-exposure noise reduction will be disabled. In
continuous release modes, the frame advance rate will change
(0 132).
252 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting
Options
To view the movie shooting menu,
select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
254
254
254
254
254
255
255
256
256
256
256
257
257
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
0
257
257
258
258
258
258
259
259
259
260
260
260
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Movie Shooting Menu Defaults” (0 171).
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 253
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore movie shooting menu options to their
default values (0 171).
File Naming
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in
which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC” (0 189).
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see “Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality”
(0 139).
Movie Quality
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose from High quality and Normal.
Movie File Type
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Record movies in MOV or MP4 format.
254 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity
settings.
• Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper
limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
from values between ISO 200 and
25600. Auto ISO sensitivity control is
used in modes P, S, and A and when On is selected for Auto ISO
control (mode M) in mode M.
• Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On to enable auto ISO sensitivity
control in mode M, Off to use the value selected for ISO
sensitivity (mode M).
• ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M
from values between ISO 100 and 25600. Auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in other modes.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This
can be prevented by choosing a lower value for ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity.
White Balance
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the white balance for movies
(0 63). Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 255
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a Picture Control for movies
(0 112). Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos.
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Create custom Picture Controls (0 202).
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating movies with natural
contrast. Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos (0 129, 143).
High ISO NR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies
recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 206).
256 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Vignette Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce vignetting in movies (0 207). Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Diffraction Compensation
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce diffraction in movies (0 207).
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in movies (0 207).
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the
camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or
manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power
supply.
D “Flicker Reduction” in the Movie Shooting Menu
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in
which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher fnumber). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s
for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 257
Metering
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera meters exposure in movie mode
(0 127). Spot metering is not available.
Release Mode (Save Frame)
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
You can choose the release mode for photographs taken in
movie mode (0 44).
Option
U
c
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. Regardless of the
Single frame
option selected, a maximum of 40 photos can be
taken with each movie.
The camera takes photographs while the shutterrelease button is held down; the length of time
available for the burst is shown in the shooting
Continuous display. The frame rate varies with the option
selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie
shooting menu. Only one photograph can be taken
at a time while movie recording is in progress.
Focus Mode
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a focus mode for movie recording (0 51).
AF-Area Mode
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode (0 54).
258 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Optical VR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose an optical vibration reduction option for movie
recording (0 135). Select Same as photo settings to use the
option currently selected for photos.
Electronic VR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in
movie mode.
Microphone Sensitivity
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Turn built-in or external microphones on
or off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Choose Auto to adjust sensitivity
automatically or Microphone off to turn
sound recording off; to select
microphone sensitivity manually, select
Manual and choose a sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies that were recorded without sound
are indicated by a 2 icon in movie and fullframe playback.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 259
Attenuator
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio
distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
If S Wide range is selected, built-in and external
microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from
music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal
range to bring out human voices.
Wind Noise Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable wind-noise reduction during movie
recording. For more information, see “Wind Noise Reduction”
(0 142).
260 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the
A tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 261
The following Custom Settings are available:
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
c
c1
c2
c3
Custom Setting 1
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
Auto-area AF face/eye detection
Focus points used
AF activation
Focus point wrap-around
Focus point options
Low-light AF
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Manual focus ring in AF mode 2
Metering/exposure
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Self-timer
Power off delay
262 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
0
264
265
265
266
266
267
267
267
268
269
270
270
271
271
272
272
273
Custom Setting 1
d
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
Shooting/display
CL mode shooting speed
Max. continuous release
Exposure delay mode
Shutter type
Limit selectable image area
File number sequence
Apply settings to live view
Framing grid display
Peaking highlights
View all in continuous mode
Bracketing/flash
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Exposure comp. for flash
Auto c ISO sensitivity control
Bracketing order
Controls
Customize i menu
Custom controls (shooting)
Custom controls (playback)
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
Reverse indicators
0
274
274
274
275
275
276
277
277
277
277
278
279
279
279
280
281
282
288
290
292
292
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 263
0
Custom Setting 1
g Movie
g1 Customize i menu
g2 Custom controls
g3 AF speed
g4 AF tracking sensitivity
g5 Highlight display
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U“).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
293
294
299
299
300
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Custom Settings Menu Defaults” (0 172).
Reset Custom Settings
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values
(0 172).
264 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses
in focus mode AF-C.
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
(focus priority).
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for focus mode. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
a2: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces or on
faces and eyes when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
Description
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it
automatically focuses on one or the other of the
Face and eye
subject’s eyes, or on the subject’s face if the eyes are
detection on
not detected.
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it
Face detection on
automatically focuses on the subject’s face.
Off
Face and eye detection disabled.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 265
a3: Focus Points Used
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option
R
I
Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area
All points
mode can be selected.
The number of available focus points is reduced by
Every other three quarters (the number of focus points available in
point
Wide-area AF (L) mode does not change). Use for
quick focus-point selection.
a4: AF Activation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus
(Shutter/AF-ON) or if focus can only be adjusted using the
controls to which AF-ON has been assigned (AF-ON only).
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the display to another. If Wrap is selected, focus-point
selection will “wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top,
right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing the 2
when a focus point at the right edge of the display is highlighted
selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the
display.
266 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a6: Focus Point Options
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose from the following focus point display options:
• Manual focus mode: Choose On to display the active focus point in
manual focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during
focus point selection.
• Dynamic-area AF assist: If On is selected, both the selected focus
point and the surrounding focus points will be displayed in
dynamic-area AF mode. Choose Off to display only the
selected focus point.
a7: Low-Light AF
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On for more accurate focus under low light (applies only
when AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and
the camera is shooting using AF-S).
• This option only takes effect in photo mode.
• In b, h, and q modes, Low-light AF is fixed at On.
• The camera may require more time to focus when On is
selected.
• While low-light AF is in effect,
“Low-light” will appear in the display
and the display refresh rate may drop.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 267
a8: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist
the focus operation in photo mode when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Off
Description
The illuminator lights as required when AF-S is selected for
focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting
using AF-S.
The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation.
The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–
9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood. Do not
obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
268 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a9: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual
focus in autofocus mode. Choose from the options below.
• Enable: Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus
ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
(autofocus with manual override). To refocus using autofocus,
lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press
it halfway again.
• Disable: The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus
while autofocus mode is selected.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 269
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash
compensation.
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure
compensation.
• On (auto reset): In modes P, S, and A, exposure compensation can
be set by rotating the command dial not currently used for
shutter speed or aperture (easy exposure compensation is not
available in other modes). The setting selected using the
command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the
standby timer expires (exposure compensation settings
selected using the E button are not reset).
• On: As above, except that the exposure compensation value
selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera
turns off or the standby timer expires.
• Off: Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
and rotating the main command dial.
270 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
b3: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the size of the area given the most weight in centerweighted metering.
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure
can be fine-tuned separately for each
metering method by from +1 to −1 EV in
steps of 1/6 EV.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
The exposure compensation (E) icon is not displayed when exposure
fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure
has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 271
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Option
O
P
Description
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks
On (half press)
exposure.
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release
On (burst mode)
button is pressed all the way down.
Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock
Off
exposure.
c2: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when
Number of shots is more than 1.
272 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
c3: Power Off Delay
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how long the camera displays remain on when no
operations are performed. Different settings can be chosen for
Playback, Menus, Image review, and Standby timer; note that
each of these delays is extended by one minute in self-timer
mode. Standby timer determines how long the monitor or
viewfinder display remains on when no operations are
performed during shooting (the monitor and viewfinder dim a
few seconds before the standby timer expires). Choose shorter
power-off delays for longer battery life.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 273
d: Shooting/Display
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous
release mode.
d2: Max. Continuous Release
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1
and 100. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no
limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst
when a shutter speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
D The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills (r00).
d3: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to
3 seconds after the shutter-release button is pressed.
274 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d4: Shutter Type
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
Option
O
P
x
Description
The camera chooses the shutter type
automatically according to shutter speed. The
Auto
electronic front-curtain shutter is used to reduce
blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
Mechanical
The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all
shutter
photos.
Electronic front- The camera uses the electronic front-curtain
curtain shutter shutter for all photos.
D “Mechanical Shutter”
Mechanical shutter is not available with some lenses.
D “Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter”
The fastest shutter speed available when Electronic front-curtain
shutter is selected is 1/2000 s.
d5: Limit Selectable Image Area
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options available when
image-area selection is assigned to the i
menu or to the command dials and a
camera control. Highlight the desired
options and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to save changes when
settings are complete.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 275
d6: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding
one to the last file number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last number used when a
new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
On
Off
Reset
Description
File numbering continues from the last number used. This
simplifies file management by minimizing the occurrence
of duplicate file names.
File numbering restarts from 0001 or from the largest file
number in the current folder (if you turn sequential file
numbering off and then on again, file numbering will
resume from the last number used).
As for On, except that the next picture taken after Reset is
selected is assigned a file number by adding one to the
largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is
empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
D File Number Sequence
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file
numbering will restart from 0001. The new folder is assigned a number
one higher than current folder number or, if a folder with that number
already exists, the lowest available folder number. If the current folder
is numbered 999, the camera will not be able to create a new folder
and the shutter release will be disabled (in addition, movie recording
may be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files
needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in the
folder containing over 5000 files or a file with a number over 9999). To
resume shooting, choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 (File number
sequence) and then either format the current memory card or insert a
new memory card.
276 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d7: Apply Settings to Live View
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white
balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect
color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust
brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option
selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always
visible in movie mode). A g icon is displayed when Off is
selected.
d8: Framing Grid Display
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to display a grid for reference when framing shots.
d9: Peaking Highlights
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects
that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display.
Choose the peaking level and outline color.
• Peaking level: Choose from 3 (high sensitivity), 2 (standard),
1 (low sensitivity), and Off; the higher the value, the greater
the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
• Peaking highlight color: Choose the highlight color.
d10: View All in Continuous Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
If Off is selected, the display will go blank during burst
photography.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 277
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the flash sync speed.
• 1/200 s (Auto FP): Selecting this option (available only when an
optional flash unit is attached) enables auto FP high-speed
sync with compatible flash units; the maximum sync speed for
other flash units is set to 1/200 s. When the camera shows a
shutter speed of 1/200 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync
will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s,
and shutter speeds as fast as 1/4000 s can be selected by the
camera (modes P and A) or by the user (modes S and M).
• 1/200 s–1/60 s: Set the maximum flash sync speed to the selected
value.
D Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows optional flash units to be used at the
highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to
choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even in
bright sunlight.
278 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A
(regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow
as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow
rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option
YE
E
Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are
Entire frame
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire
frame.
Exposure compensation applies to background
Background only
only.
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO
sensitivity control is enabled.
e
f
Option
Description
The camera takes both the main subject and
Subject and
background lighting into account when adjusting ISO
background
sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main
Subject only
subject is correctly exposed.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 279
e5: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure,
flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the
following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by
the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the
highest value. If Under > MTR > over (I) is selected, shooting
will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This
setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
280 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f: Controls
f1: Customize i Menu
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for photo mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the
menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J, and
choosing the desired option.
J
8
o
E
Option
Choose image area
0
189
Image quality
122
Image size
124
Exposure compensation
Set Picture Control
98
96,
192
63,
116
112
Color space
205
Active D-Lighting
129
Long exposure NR
206
High ISO NR
206
Metering
127
Flash mode
104
Flash compensation
212
51,
136
54,
136
135
9 ISO sensitivity settings
m White balance
h
p
y
q
r
w
c
Y
s Focus mode
t AF-area mode
u Optical VR
Option
t Auto bracketing
$ Multiple exposure
2 HDR (high dynamic
range)
L Silent photography
v Release mode
w Custom controls
(shooting)
z Exposure delay mode
O Shutter type
y
Apply settings to live
view
Peaking highlights
W
3 Monitor/viewfinder
brightness
Z Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
L Wireless remote
connection
0
213
223
230
67
131
282
274
275
277
277
303,
304
314
128
319
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 281
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in
photo mode, whether used individually or in combination with
the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J.
w Fn1 button
j AE-L/AF-L button
z Movie record
y Fn2 button
k OK button
S Lens Fn button
button
l Lens control ring
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option
K
A
F
E
D
C
B
r
h
q
1
4
b
w y j k z S l
Select center focus point
— — — ✔ — —
—
AF-ON
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
—
AF lock only
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
—
AE lock (Hold)
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔
—
AE lock (Reset on release)
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔
—
AE lock only
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
—
AE/AF lock
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
—
FV lock
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
—
Flash off
✔ ✔ — — — ✔
—
Preview
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
Bracketing burst
✔ ✔ — — — ✔
—
+ NEF (RAW)
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
Framing grid display
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
282 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
p
O
3
K
J
8
m
h
y
w
I/Y
v
z
t
$
2
z
W
X
q
E
9
w y j k z S l
Zoom on/off
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
—
MY MENU
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
Access top item in MY MENU
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
Playback
✔ ✔ — — — ✔
—
Choose image area
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Image quality/size
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
White balance
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Set Picture Control
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Active D-Lighting
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Metering
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Flash mode/compensation
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Release mode
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Focus mode/AF-area mode
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Auto bracketing
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Multiple exposure
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
HDR (high dynamic range)
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Exposure delay mode
✔ ✔ — — ✔ —
—
Peaking highlights
✔ ✔ — — — —
—
Focus (M/A)
— — — — — — ✔ 1, 2
Aperture
— — — — — — ✔2
Exposure compensation
— — — — — — ✔2
ISO sensitivity
— — — — — — ✔2
None
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to
adjust focus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 283
The following options are available:
Option
Description
K Select center Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
focus point
A AF-ON
F AF lock only
E
D
C
B
r
h
q
1
Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the control is pressed a
second time or the standby timer expires.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the control is pressed a
on release)
second time, the shutter is released, or the
standby timer expires.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
AE/AF lock
pressed.
Press the control to lock flash value for the built-in
FV lock
flash or optional flash units. Press again to cancel
FV lock.
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be disabled
Flash off
while the control is pressed.
Keep the control pressed to preview color,
Preview
exposure, and depth of field.
If the control is pressed while exposure or ADL
bracketing is active in single frame release mode,
all shots in the current bracketing program will be
Bracketing
taken each time the shutter-release button is
burst
pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or a
continuous release mode is selected, the camera
will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutterrelease button is held down.
284 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
4 + NEF (RAW)
b Framing grid
display
p
Zoom on/off
O MY MENU
3 Access top
item in
MY MENU
Description
If a JPEG option is currently selected for image
quality, “RAW” will be displayed and an NEF (RAW)
copy will be recorded with the next picture taken
after the control is pressed (the original image
quality setting will be restored when you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button). NEF
(RAW) copies are recorded at the setting currently
selected for NEF (RAW) recording in the photo
shooting menu. To exit without recording an NEF
(RAW) copy, press the control again.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display
on or off.
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press the
control again to zoom out.
Pressing the control displays “MY MENU”.
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
Press the control to start playback.
K Playback
J Choose image Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the image area.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Image
dial to choose an image quality option and the
quality/size
sub-command dial to select image size.
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a white balance option (in some
White balance
cases, a sub-option can be selected using the subcommand dial).
area
8
m
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 285
Option
h Set Picture
Control
y
w
I/Y
v
z
t
$
2
Description
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a Picture Control.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
Metering
choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Flash mode/
dial to choose a flash mode and the sub-command
compensation
dial to adjust flash output.
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a release mode. In Continuous L or
Release mode Self-timer mode, you can rotate the subcommand dial to choose the frame advance rate
or release delay.
Press the control and rotate the main and subFocus mode/
command dials to choose the focus and AF-area
AF-area mode
modes.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Auto
dial to choose the number of shots and the subbracketing
command dial to select the bracketing increment
or Active D-Lighting amount.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Multiple
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
exposure
dial to choose the number of shots.
HDR (high
Press the control and rotate the main command
dynamic
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
range)
dial to choose the exposure differential.
Active
D-Lighting
z Exposure
delay mode
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the shutter-release delay.
286 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
W Peaking
highlights
X Focus (M/A)
q Aperture
E Exposure
compensation
Description
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a peaking level and the subcommand dial to select the peaking color.
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the
control ring while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway (autofocus with manual override).
To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from
the shutter-release button and then press it
halfway again.
Use the control to adjust aperture.
Use the control to adjust exposure compensation.
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO
9 ISO sensitivity sensitivity.
None
The control has no effect.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 287
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the roles assigned to the A (L)
and J buttons during playback.
Highlight the desired control and press
J.
AE-L/AF-L Button
The following roles can be assigned to the A (L) button:
Option
h
g
c
Description
The control performs the function selected for
Same as j
Custom Setting f2 (Custom controls
when shooting
(shooting)) > j AE-L/AF-L button.
Press the control during playback to protect the
Protect
current picture.
Press the control and then use the multi selector
Rating
to rate the current picture during playback.
288 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
OK Button
Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option
selected, pressing J when a movie is displayed full frame starts
movie playback.
Option
Description
n Thumbnail on/ Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail
off
o View
histograms
p Zoom on/off
u Choose folder
playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
a histogram is displayed while the J button is
pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom (to choose the zoom ratio,
highlight Zoom on/off and press 2). The zoom
display is centered on the active focus point.
A folder-selection dialog will be displayed;
highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures
in the selected folder.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 289
f4: Customize Command Dials
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
• Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of
rotation of the command dials for
selected operations. Highlight options
and press 2 to select or deselect, and
then press J to save changes and exit.
• Change main/sub: Choose the roles played by the command dials
for exposure and focus operations.
- Exposure setting: If On is selected, the main command dial will
control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If
On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used
to set aperture in mode A only.
- Autofocus setting: This option applies to the control assigned
Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2
(Custom controls (shooting)). If On is selected, the focus
mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and
rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping
the control pressed and rotating the main command dial.
290 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
• Menus and playback: Select Off to use the multi selector for menus
and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is
selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight
thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in
full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the
option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail
playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed,
rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu
for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the
previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J. Select On
(image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from
being used for playback during image review.
• Sub-dial frame advance: When On or On (image review
excluded) is selected for Menus and playback, the subcommand dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to
select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time,
or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or
previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or
previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating,
highlight Rating and press 2).
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 291
f5: Release Button to Use Dial
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by
rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends
when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
• This setting applies to the E and S buttons.
• It also applies to controls to which the following roles have
been assigned via custom control assignment: Choose image
area, Image quality/size, White balance, Set Picture
Control, Active D-Lighting, Metering, Flash mode/
compensation, Release mode, Focus mode/AF-area mode,
Auto bracketing, Multiple exposure, HDR (high dynamic
range), Exposure delay mode, Peaking highlights, and
Microphone sensitivity.
f6: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
If
(W) is selected, the exposure indicator is
displayed with negative values on the left and positive values
on the right. Select
(V) to display positive
values on the left and negative values on the right.
292 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g: Movie
g1: Customize i Menu
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for movie mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the
menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J, and
choosing the desired option.
Option
G Frame size and rate/
Image quality
E Exposure compensation
9 ISO sensitivity settings
m White balance
h Set Picture Control
y Active D-Lighting
w Metering
s Focus mode
t AF-area mode
u Optical VR
4 Electronic VR
0
H
139
5
98
6
255
7
63, v
116
112
129,
143
127,
143
51,
144
54,
144
135
Option
Microphone sensitivity
0
141
Attenuator
260
Frequency response
260
Wind noise reduction
260
Release mode (save
frame)
258
W Peaking highlights
9 Highlight display
3 Monitor/viewfinder
brightness
Z Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
L Wireless remote
connection
277
300
303,
304
314
128
319
143
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 293
g2: Custom Controls
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in
movie mode, whether used individually or in combination with
the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J.
w Fn1 button
j AE-L/AF-L button
l Lens control ring
y Fn2 button
k OK button
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
w y j k
l
Power aperture (open)
✔
—
—
—
—
Power aperture (close)
—
✔
—
—
—
Exposure compensation +
✔
—
—
—
—
Exposure compensation –
—
✔
—
—
—
Framing grid display
✔
✔
—
—
—
Select center focus point
—
—
—
✔
—
AF-ON
—
—
✔
—
—
AF lock only
—
—
✔
—
—
AE lock (Hold)
—
—
✔
—
—
AE lock only
—
—
✔
—
—
AE/AF lock
—
—
✔
—
—
Zoom on/off
—
—
✔
✔
—
Record movies
—
—
✔
✔
—
White balance
✔
✔
—
—
—
Option
t
q
i
h
b
K
A
F
E
C
B
p
1
m
294 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
h Set Picture Control
y Active D-Lighting
w Metering
c Release mode (save frame)
z Focus mode/AF-area mode
H Microphone sensitivity
W Peaking highlights
X Focus (M/A)
q Power aperture
E Exposure compensation
9 ISO sensitivity
None
w y j k
l
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
— ✔ 1, 2
—
—
—
—
✔2
—
—
—
—
✔2
—
—
—
—
✔2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to
adjust focus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 295
The following options are available:
Option
t Power aperture
(open)
q Power aperture
(close)
i
Exposure
compensation +
h
Exposure
compensation –
b Framing grid
display
K Select center
focus point
A AF-ON
F AF lock only
E AE lock (Hold)
Description
Aperture widens while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
(Custom controls) > Fn2 button > Power
aperture (close) for button-controlled aperture
adjustment.
Aperture narrows while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
(Custom controls) > Fn1 button > Power
aperture (open) for button-controlled aperture
adjustment.
Exposure compensation increases while the
control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 (Custom controls) > Fn2
button > Exposure compensation − for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the
control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 (Custom controls) > Fn1
button > Exposure compensation + for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display
on or off.
Pressing the control selects the center focus
point.
Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
remains locked until the control is pressed a
second time or the standby timer expires.
296 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
C
Option
AE lock only
B
AE/AF lock
p
Zoom on/off
1
Record movies
m White balance
h Set Picture
Control
y
Active
D-Lighting
w Metering
c Release mode
(save frame)
z Focus mode/
AF-area mode
H Microphone
sensitivity
W Peaking
highlights
Description
Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press the
control again to zoom out.
Press the control to start movie recording.
Recording ends when the control is pressed
again.
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a white balance option (in some
cases, a sub-option can be selected using the
sub-command dial).
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a Picture Control.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the release mode for photographs taken
during movie recording.
Press the control and rotate the main and subcommand dials to choose the focus and AF-area
modes.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust microphone sensitivity.
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a peaking level and the subcommand dial to select the peaking color.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 297
Option
X
Description
Use the control to focus manually, independent
of the option selected for focus mode. To refocus
Focus (M/A)
using autofocus, press the shutter-release
button halfway or press a control to which AF-ON
has been assigned.
Power aperture Use the control to adjust aperture.
q
E Exposure
compensation
9 ISO sensitivity
None
Use the control to adjust exposure
compensation.
Use the control to adjust ISO sensitivity.
The control has no effect.
D Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in modes A and M (a 6 icon indicates
that power aperture cannot be used). The display may flicker while
aperture is adjusted.
298 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g3: AF Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the focus speed for movie mode.
To choose when the selected option
applies, highlight When to apply and
press 2. Choose from Always (the
selected option applies whenever the
camera is in movie mode) and Only
while recording (the selected option applies only while
recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or
in other words as fast possible).
g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how quickly focus responds
when your subject leaves the focus point
or something passes between the
subject and the camera in movie mode.
Choose from values between 7 (Low)
and 1 (High). The higher the value, the
slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on
your original subject when something passes between the
subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the
camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by
shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 299
g5: Highlight Display
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright
areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to
trigger the highlight display.
• Display pattern: To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1
or Pattern 2.
Highlights
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
• Highlight display threshold: Choose the brightness needed to
trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the
greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as
highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show
only areas that are potentially overexposed.
D Highlight Display
If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled, only
peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view
the highlight display, select Off for Custom Setting d9 (Peaking
highlights) > Peaking level.
300 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab
in the camera menus.
Option
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Copyright information
Beep options
0
302
302
302
302
303
303
304
305
306
307
308
310
311
312
Option
Touch controls
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Connect to PC
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
0
312
313
313
313
313
314
316
319
320
321
321
322
322
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Setup Menu Defaults” (0 176).
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 301
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Yes to format the memory card.
Note that formatting permanently deletes
all pictures and other data on the card.
Before formatting, be sure to make
backup copies as required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
Save User Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to
the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial (0 78).
Reset User Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Reset settings for U1 and U2 to default values (0 79).
Language
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased.
302 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off. Be sure to
check the camera clock regularly against more accurate
timepieces and adjust time and date settings as necessary.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically
Time zone
set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock
Daylight saving
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
time
The default setting is Off.
If the clock is reset, a t indicator will be displayed.
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values
for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
• Monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the monitor is
the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder
only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
• Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 303
Viewfinder Brightness
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust viewfinder brightness.
• Viewfinder brightness can only be adjusted when the
viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the
viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
• Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Option
Auto
Manual
Description
Viewfinder brightness is adjusted automatically in
response to lighting conditions.
Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness manually. Choose
higher values for increased brightness, lower values for
reduced brightness.
304 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Viewfinder Color Balance
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust viewfinder color balance to your taste. Adjustments
made using Viewfinder color balance must be made using the
viewfinder. They cannot be made in the monitor or when
Monitor only is selected for monitor mode.
• Viewfinder color balance is adjusted
using the multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4,
and 2 to adjust color balance as shown
below. Press J to exit when
adjustments are complete.
Increase green
Increase
blue
Increase
amber
Increase magenta
• Viewfinder color balance applies only to the menu, playback,
and shooting displays; pictures taken with the camera are not
affected.
• The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in
playback mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card
contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
• To choose a different image, tap the
W button. Highlight the desired
picture and press J to select it as the
reference image.
• To view the highlighted image full
frame, touch and hold the X button.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 305
Information Display
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust the color of the lettering in the information display for
ease of viewing. Choose Dark on light (w) to display black letters
on a white background or Light on dark (x) to display white
letters on a dark background.
Dark on light
306 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Light on dark
AF Fine-Tune
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Fine-tune focus for up to 30 lens types. Use only as required. We
recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance
you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus
distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer
distances.
• AF fine-tune (On/Off): Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn
it off.
• Saved value: Tune AF for the current lens.
Current value
Press 1 to move focal point away from
camera or 3 to move focal point
toward camera; choose from values
between +20 and –20. The camera can
store values for up to 30 lens types.
Only one value can be stored for each
Saved value
type of lens.
• Default: Choose the AF tuning value
used when no previously saved value exists for the current
lens.
• List saved values: List previously saved AF
tuning values. To delete a lens from the
list, highlight the desired lens and press
O. To change a lens identifier (for
example, to choose an identifier that is
the same as the last two digits of the
lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the
same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used
with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and
press 2. A menu will be displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an
identifier and press J to save changes and exit.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 307
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D
online help).
A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended
when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1 Select Start.
Highlight Start and press J. A
message will be displayed.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the display.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
308 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable
to acquire Image Dust Off reference
data and a message will be displayed.
Choose another reference object and
repeat the process from Step 1.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or
at different apertures. Reference images
cannot be viewed using computer imaging
software. A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 309
Image Comment
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data
page in the photo information display. The following options are
available:
• Input comment: Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”
(0 186). Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Highlight Attach
comment and press 2 to turn it on or
off. After choosing the desired setting,
press J to exit.
310 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data
shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options
are available:
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”
(0 186). Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
in “Text Entry” (0 186). Copyright holder names can be up to
54 characters long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information
to all subsequent photographs.
Highlight Attach copyright
information and press 2 to turn it on
or off. After choosing the desired
setting, press J to exit.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or
transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 311
Beep Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:
• The self-timer is in operation
• Time-lapse recording ends
• The camera focuses in photo mode (note that a beep will not
sound if AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and
the camera is shooting using AF-C)
• The touch screen is used
Note that a beep will not sound while the self-timer is in
operation or when the focuses if On is selected for Silent
photography in the photo shooting menu.
The Beep options menu contains the following items:
• Beep on/off: Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch
controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry
while enabling it for other purposes.
• Volume: Adjust beep volume.
• Pitch: Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low.
Touch Controls
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
• Enable/disable touch controls: Select Disable to prevent accidental
use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable
touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
• Full-frame playback flicks: Choose whether the next image in fullframe playback is displayed by flicking left or by flicking right.
312 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Self-Portrait Mode
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Disable to prevent the camera entering self-portrait
mode when the monitor is in the self-portrait position.
HDMI
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 396).
Location Data Display
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View location data downloaded from smart devices using the
SnapBridge app. The items displayed vary with the smart device.
Airplane Mode
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Enable to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and
Wi-Fi functions.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 313
Connect to Smart Device
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Connect to smartphones or tablets
(smart devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option
Start pairing
Description
Pair the camera with a smart device (0 373).
List paired smart devices or switch from one device to
Paired devices
another.
Bluetooth
Select Enable to enable Bluetooth.
connection
Select to Send (Bluetooth)
Select pictures for upload to a smart device or choose whether
to mark pictures for upload as they are taken. Upload begins
immediately when a connection is established.
Option
Auto select to
send
Description
If On is selected, photos will be marked for upload to a
smart device as they are taken (this does not apply to
photos taken in movie mode, which must be selected
for upload manually). Regardless of the option selected
with the camera, photos are uploaded in JPEG format at
a size of 2 megapixels.
Manual select to
Mark selected pictures for upload.
send
Deselect all Remove transfer marking from all images.
314 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wi-Fi Connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
❚❚ Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device. To connect, select
the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password
(0 367). Once a connection is established, this option will
change to Close Wi-Fi connection, which can be used to end
the connection when desired.
❚❚ Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
• SSID: Set the camera SSID.
• Authentication/encryption: Choose OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES.
• Password: Set the camera password.
• Channel: Select Auto to have the camera choose the channel
automatically, or select Manual and choose the channel
manually.
• Current settings: View current Wi-Fi settings.
• Reset connection settings: Select Yes to reset Wi-Fi settings to
default values.
Send While Off
If On is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected
via Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 315
Connect to PC
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Connect to computers via Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Connection
Select Enable to connect using the settings currently selected
for Network settings.
316 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Network Settings
Select Create profile to create a new network profile (0 349,
353). If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to
select a profile from a list. To edit an existing profile, highlight it
and press 2. The following options will be displayed:
• General: The profile name and password. Select Profile name to
rename the profile (by default, the profile name is the same as
the network SSID). To require that a password be entered
before the profile can be changed select On for Password
protection (to change the password, highlight On and press
2).
• Wireless: Adjust settings for connection to a network via a router
(infrastructure mode) or for direct wireless connection to the
camera (access-point mode).
- Infrastructure mode: Enter the network SSID and password and
choose the type of authentication/encryption used on the
network (OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES). The channel is selected
automatically.
- Access-point mode: Enter the SSID and choose a channel (select
Auto for automatic channel selection or Manual to choose
the channel manually) and authentication/encryption type
(OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES) used for connection to the
camera. If WPA2-PSK-AES is selected for Authentication/
encryption, you can also set the camera password.
• TCP/IP: If Enable is selected for Obtain automatically, the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode connections
will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic IP addressing.
Select Disable manually to enter the IP address (Address) and
sub-net mask (Mask). Note that an IP address is required for
infrastructure mode connections.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 317
Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚❚ Auto Send
Select On to upload new photos as they are taken. Upload
begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory
card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. Movies
and photos taken in movie mode are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete but must instead be
uploaded from the playback display (0 360).
❚❚ Delete After Send
Select Yes to delete photographs from the camera memory card
automatically once upload is complete (files marked for transfer
before this option is selected are not deleted). Deletion may be
suspended during some camera operations.
❚❚ Send File As
When uploading NEF+JPEG images, choose whether to upload
both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
❚❚ Deselect All?
Select Yes to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload of
images with a “sending” icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC Address
View the MAC address.
318 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Establish a Bluetooth connection to an
optional ML-L7 remote control. You can
also choose the roles assigned to the Fn1
and Fn2 buttons on the remote.
Wireless Remote Connection
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Connect to a paired ML-L7. Any existing connection to a
smart device or computer will end.
End the connection to the ML-L7.
Save Wireless Remote Controller
Ready the camera for pairing with an ML-L7 remote control.
When the camera is ready, press the power button on the
remote controller for over three seconds until the devices are
paired. The remote controller’s status lamp will flash green
approximately once every three seconds when pairing is
complete.
The camera can be paired with only one remote controller at a
time. It can only be used with the controller with which it was
most recently paired.
Delete Wireless Remote Controller
End an existing pairing connection between the camera and an
ML-L7.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 319
Assign Fn1 Button/Assign Fn2 Button
Choose the roles assigned to the ML-L7’s Fn1 and Fn2 buttons.
Option
Same as camera
K button
Same as camera
G button
Same as camera
i button
None
Description
The button performs the same function as the camera
K button.
The button performs the same function as the camera
G button.
The button performs the same function as the camera i
button.
Pressing the button has no effect.
A The Remote Controller Status LED
The status of an ML-L7 interacting with the camera is shown by the
controller status lamp:
Color
Green
Orange
Red
Behavior
Status
Flashes approximately once a second
Searching for paired camera.
Flashes quickly (approximately twice a
second)
Pairing.
Flashes approximately once every three
seconds
Connected to camera.
Flashes once
Photography started.
Flashes twice
Photography ended.
Flashes once
Movie recording started.
Flashes twice
Movie recording ended.
Conformity Marking
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
320 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Energy Saving
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
In photo mode, the shooting display will turn off to save power
approximately 15 seconds before the standby timer expires.
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may
drop.
Disable energy saving. Note selecting Disable does not
stop the shooting display dimming a few seconds
before the standby expires.
D Note: Energy Saving
• Note that even when Enable is selected, energy saving will not
function:
- If No limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) >
Standby timer or if the delay selected is less than 30 seconds
- In self-portrait mode
- In U or 6 mode
- During display zoom
- While the camera is connected to another device via HDMI or USB
• Selecting Disable increases the drain on the battery.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 321
Reset All Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to
their default values. Copyright information and other usergenerated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be
restored.
Firmware Version
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View the current camera firmware version.
322 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To view the retouch menu, select the
N tab in the camera menus.
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
7
k
8
i
l
j
Option
0
NEF (RAW) processing
326
Trim
329
Resize
330
D-Lighting
332
Quick retouch
332
Red-eye correction
333
Option
Z
a
e
o
9
p
0
Straighten
333
Distortion control
334
Perspective control
335
Image overlay 1
336
Trim movie
339
Side-by-side comparison 2
339
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Can only be displayed by pressing i and selecting Retouch when a retouched image or
original is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 323
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2
to select.
2 Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J. To
view the highlighted picture full
screen, touch and hold the X button.
D Retouch
In the case of images recorded at image quality settings of NEF +
JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. The camera may
not be able to display or retouch images created with other
devices.
3 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
D Power off Delay
The display will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no
actions are performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will
be lost. To increase the time the display remains on, choose a
longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 (Power off
delay) > Menus.
324 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
4 Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Retouched copies are indicated by a
p icon.
D Retouching the Current Image
To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
Retouch.
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although (with the exception of Trim movie) each option can
be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of
detail). Options that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed
out and unavailable.
D Image Quality
• Cropped and resized copies created from NEF (RAW) images are
saved at an Image quality of JPEG fine.
• Copies created from JPEG images are the same quality as the original.
D Image Size
Except in the case of copies created with NEF (RAW) processing, Trim,
and Resize, copies are the same size as the original.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 325
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
“NEF (RAW) processing” is used to convert NEF (RAW)
photographs to other formats, such as JPEG. To create JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) photographs on the camera, follow the
steps below.
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2.
2 Choose how images are selected.
Choose from the following options:
• Select image(s): Select one or more
images manually.
• Select date: Create JPEG copies of all
the NEF (RAW) images taken on
selected dates.
• Select all images: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW)
images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
326 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Select photographs.
If you chose Select image(s) in Step
2, a picture selection dialog will be
displayed listing only NEF (RAW)
images created with this camera.
Highlight images using the multi
selector and tap the W button to
select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a L icon.
To view the highlighted image full screen, touch and hold the
X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your selection is
complete.
If you chose Select date in Step 2, a
list of dates will be displayed.
Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to select all NEF
(RAW) pictures taken on the chosen
dates and proceed to Step 4.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 327
4 Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original (if
available) to use the setting in effect when the photograph
was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview).
Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values
between −2 and +2 EV.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Image quality........................... 122
6 High ISO NR ..............................206
2 Image size................................. 124
7 Color space ...............................205
3 White balance....................63, 116
8 Vignette control.......................207
4 Exposure compensation...........98
9 Diffraction compensation .....207
5 Set Picture Control......... 112, 200 10 Active D-Lighting ....................129
5 Copy the photographs.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected
photograph (if multiple photos are
selected, a confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J
to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without
copying the photographs, press the K button.
328 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected
photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow;
create a cropped copy as described below.
• To reduce size of the crop: Tap W.
• To increase size of the crop: Tap X.
• To change the crop aspect ratio: Rotate the main command dial.
• To position the crop: Use the multi selector.
• To create a cropped copy: Press J to save
the current crop as a separate file. The
size of the copy varies with crop size
and aspect ratio and appears at upper
left in the crop display.
D Viewing Cropped Copies
Depending on the dimensions of the cropped copy, playback zoom
may not be available when the copy is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 329
Resize
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Use the Resize option in the camera menu N tab to create small
copies of selected photographs.
1 Select Resize.
Highlight Resize in the N tab and
press 2.
2 Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight the desired size and press J.
330 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image(s) and press
2.
Highlight pictures and tap W to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, touch
and hold the X button). Selected
pictures are marked by a 8 icon.
Press J when the selection is
complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area
setting of 1 : 1 (16×16) or 16 : 9 (24×14) cannot be resized.
4 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Highlight Yes and press J
to save the resized copies.
D Viewing Resized Copies
Depending on the dimensions of the resized copy, playback zoom may
not be available when the resized copy is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 331
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
After
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Quick Retouch
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies with enhanced saturation
and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as
required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
enhancement. Press J to copy the
photograph.
332 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
This option is used to correct “red-eye” and is available only with
photographs taken using a flash. The photograph selected for
red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm
the effects of red-eye correction and press J to create a copy.
Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the
expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied
to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check
the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
Straighten
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a straightened copy of the
selected image. Press 2 to rotate the
image clockwise by up to five degrees in
increments of approximately 0.25
degrees, 4 to rotate it counter-clockwise
(the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a
square copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 333
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and
then make fine adjustments using the
multi selector, or select Manual to
reduce distortion manually. Note that
Auto is not available with photos taken using the Auto
distortion control option in the photo shooting menu or copies
previously processed using Auto, and that distortion control
cannot be performed again on copies created using Manual.
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pincushion
distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note
that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy.
334 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Perspective Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective in photos taken looking up
from the base of a tall object. Use the
multi selector to adjust perspective
(note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the
edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 335
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a new picture that is saved separately from the originals.
+
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2. Image
overlay options will be displayed,
with Image 1 highlighted; press J to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay. To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, touch and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the preview display.
336 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain
from values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for the second image. The
default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it.
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5 Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition, press 4
or 2 to place the cursor in the
Preview column, then press 1 or 3
to highlight Overlay and press J
(note that colors and brightness in
the preview may differ from the final image). To save the
overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return
to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, tap W.
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay. After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 337
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth
can be combined. The overlay is saved in JPEG fine format and has the
same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and
image orientation) and values for white balance and Picture Control as
the photograph selected for Image 1. The current image comment is
appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information,
however, is not copied.
338 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim Movie
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed
(0 158).
Side-by-Side Comparison
(see below)
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option can only be accessed by pressing the i button and
selecting Retouch when a copy or original is displayed.
1 Select a retouched copy (shown by a
p icon) or an original that has been
retouched.
2 Display retouch options.
Press i and select Retouch.
3 Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison
and press J.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 339
4 Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options used to create the copy listed at
the top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy. To view the
highlighted picture full frame, touch and hold the X button. If
the copy was created from two source images using Image
overlay, or if the source has been copied multiple times,
press 1 or 3 to view the other images. To exit to playback,
press the K button, or press J to exit to full-frame playback
with the highlighted image displayed.
Options used to create copy
Source image
Retouched copy
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected or has since been deleted.
340 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To view My Menu, select the O tab in
the camera menus.
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a
customized list of up to 20 items from the playback, photo
shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch
menus. If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My
Menu.
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described
below.
Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items
and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the option you wish to
add and press 2.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 341
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item
up or down in My Menu. Press J to
add the new item.
5 Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon cannot be
selected. Repeat Steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
342 Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select
or deselect. Selected items are
indicated by a check mark.
3 Delete the selected items.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
D Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 343
Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3 Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4 Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
344 Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select
m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab.
1 Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight Choose
tab and press 2.
2 Select m RECENT SETTINGS.
Highlight m RECENT SETTINGS and
press J. The name of the menu will
change from “MY MENU” to “RECENT
SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for
m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab.
D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 345
Establishing Wireless Connections to
Computers or Smart Devices
Network Options
The types of network connection available with the camera are
shown below.
Computer
Smart Device
Access-point mode
Computer
Wireless access point
Infrastructure mode
346 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Connect via Wi-Fi to upload
selected pictures to a computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
After configuring the camera for connection, you will need to
pair it with the computer using the Wireless Transmitter Utility
before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi. Once the
devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer
from the camera.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility is a computer application
available for download from the Nikon Download Center:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com
Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release
notes and system requirements.
A Illustrations
The appearance and content of the software and operating system
dialogs, messages, and displays shown in this guide may vary with the
operating system used. For information on basic computer operations,
see the documentation provided with the computer or operating
system.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 347
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes
The camera can connect either via a wireless router on an
existing network (infrastructure mode) or by direct wireless link
(access-point mode).
❚❚ Access-Point Mode
The camera and computer
connect via direct wireless link,
with the camera acting as a
wireless LAN access point and
Access-point mode
without the need for
complicated adjustments to settings. Choose this option when
working outdoors or in other situations in which the computer is
not already connected to a wireless network. The computer
cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera.
❚❚ Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to a
computer on an existing
network (including home
networks) via a wireless router.
Infrastructure mode
The computer can still access
the Internet while connected to the camera.
D Infrastructure Mode
This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless
network. Connection to computers beyond the local area network is
not supported.
348 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting in Access-Point Mode
Follow the steps below to create a direct wireless link to a
computer in access-point mode.
1 Display network settings.
Select Connect to PC in the camera
setup menu, then highlight Network
settings and press 2.
2 Select Create profile.
Highlight Create profile and press J.
3 Select Direct connection to PC.
Highlight Direct connection to PC
and press J.
The camera SSID and encryption key
will be displayed.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 349
4 Connect from the computer.
Windows: Click the wireless
LAN icon in the taskbar and
select the SSID displayed by
the camera in Step 3. When
prompted to enter the
network security key, enter
the encryption key displayed
by the camera in Step 3.
macOS/OS X: Click the wireless
LAN icon in the menu bar
and select the SSID
displayed by the camera in
Step 3. When prompted to
supply a password, enter the
encryption key displayed by
the camera in Step 3.
5 Launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
350 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6 Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera
name displayed in Step 5
and click Next.
7 Enter the authentication code.
The camera will display an
authentication code.
Enter the authentication
code in the dialog displayed
by the Wireless Transmitter
Utility and click Next.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 351
8 Complete the pairing process.
When the camera displays a message
stating that pairing is complete, press
J.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click Next. You will be
prompted to choose the
destination folder; for more
information, see online help
for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
When you exit the Wireless Transmitter Utility after pairing is
complete, a wireless connection will be established between
the camera and computer.
9 Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
network SSID will be displayed in
green in the camera Connect to PC
menu.
If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the
camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can
upload images to the computer as described in“Uploading
Pictures” (0 360).
352 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Follow the steps below to connect to a computer on an existing
network in infrastructure mode.
1 Display network settings.
Select Connect to PC in the camera
setup menu, then highlight Network
settings and press 2.
2 Select Create profile.
Highlight Create profile and press J.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 353
3 Search for existing networks.
Highlight Search for Wi-Fi network
and press J. The camera will search
for networks currently active in the
vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
D “Easy Connect”
To connect without entering an SSID or
encryption key, tap X in Step 3, then
press J and choose from the following
options:
• Push-button WPS: For routers that support
push-button WPS. Press the camera J
button to connect.
• PIN-entry WPS: The camera will display a PIN; to connect, use a
computer to enter the PIN into the router (for more information,
see the documentation provided with the router).
After connecting, proceed to Step 6.
354 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
4 Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J
(if the desired network is not
displayed, tap X to search again).
Encrypted networks are indicated by a
h icon; if the selected network is
encrypted, you will be prompted to
enter the encryption key as described in Step 5. If the
network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6.
D Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are
indicated by blank entries in the network
list. If you highlight a blank entry and
press J, you will be prompted to provide
the network name; press J, enter a
name, and then tap X. Tap X again to
proceed to Step 5.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 355
5 Enter the encryption key.
When prompted to enter the
encryption key for the wireless router,
press J…
…and enter the key as described
below. For information on the
encryption key, see the
documentation for the wireless
router. Tap X when entry is complete.
Tap X again to initiate the connection.
The message shown in the illustration
will be displayed for a few seconds
when the connection is established.
356 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6 Obtain or select an IP address.
Highlight one of the following options
and press J.
• Obtain automatically: Select this option
if the network is configured to
supply the IP address automatically.
• Enter manually: When prompted, enter
an IP address by rotating the main command dial to
highlight segments, pressing 4 and 2 to change and
pressing J to accept. Tap X to exit to the “IP address
configuration complete” dialog when entry is complete.
Tapping X again displays the sub-net mask, which you can
edit by pressing 1 and 3, pressing J to exit when entry is
complete.
Confirm the IP address and press J to proceed.
7 Launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 357
8 Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera
name displayed in Step 7
and click Next.
9 Enter the authentication code.
The camera will display an
authentication code.
Enter the authentication
code in the dialog displayed
by the Wireless Transmitter
Utility and click Next.
358 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
10 Complete the pairing process.
Press J when the camera displays the
message shown in the illustration.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click Next. You will be
prompted to choose the
destination folder; for more
information, see the Wireless
Transmitter Utility online
help.
When you exit the Wireless Transmitter Utility after pairing is
complete, a wireless connection will be established between
the camera and computer.
11 Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the
network SSID will be displayed in
green in the camera Connect to PC
menu.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can
upload images to the computer as described in “Uploading
Pictures” (0 360).
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 359
Uploading Pictures
You can select pictures for upload in the camera playback
display or upload pictures as they are taken.
D Destination Folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders:
• Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
• Mac: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter
Utility. For more information, see the utility’s online help.
D Access Point Mode
Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera
in access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection
to the camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.
❚❚ Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select pictures for upload.
1 Start playback.
Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
2 Press the i button.
Select a picture and press the i
button to display the playback i
menu.
360 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3 Choose Select to send/deselect
(PC).
Highlight Select to send/deselect
(PC) and press J. A white transfer
icon will appear on the picture. If the
camera is currently connected to a
network, upload will begin immediately; otherwise, upload
will begin when a connection is established. The transfer icon
turns green during upload. Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload
additional images.
D Deselecting Pictures
To remove transfer marking from the current picture, highlight Select
to send/deselect (PC) and press J. To remove transfer marking from
all pictures, select Connect to PC > Options > Deselect all? in the
setup menu.
❚❚ Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken,
select On for Connect to PC > Options >
Auto send. Upload begins only after the
photo has been recorded to the memory
card; be sure a memory card is inserted in
the camera. Movies and photographs
taken in movie mode are not uploaded automatically when
recording is complete but must instead be uploaded from the
playback display.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 361
❚❚ The Transfer Icon
Upload status is indicated by the transfer
icon.
• Y (white): Send. The picture has been
selected for upload but upload has not
yet begun.
• X (green): Sending. Upload in
progress.
• Y (blue): Sent. Upload complete.
362 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
❚❚ The “Connect to PC” Status Display
The Connect to PC display shows the following information:
1
2
3
1 Status
The status of the connection to the host. The
host name is displayed in green when a
connection is established.
• While files are being transferred, the status
display shows “Now sending” preceded by
the name of the file being sent.
• Any errors that occur during transfer are also
displayed here.
2 Signal strength
Wireless signal strength.
Pictures/time
3
remaining
The estimated time required to send the
remaining pictures.
D Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost, but can
be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 363
Disconnecting and Reconnecting
The camera’s link to an existing network can be suspended or
resumed as described below.
❚❚ Disconnecting
You can disconnect by turning the camera off, selecting Disable
for Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection in the setup menu, or
selecting Wi-Fi connection > Close Wi-Fi connection in the i
menu for shooting mode. The connection to the computer will
also end if you use Wi-Fi to connect to a smart device.
D Access-Point Mode
A communication error will occur if the computer’s wireless
connection is disabled before the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.
❚❚ Reconnecting
To reconnect to an existing network, either:
• select Enable for Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection in the
setup menu, or
• choose Wi-Fi connection > Establish
Wi-Fi connection with PC in the i
menu for shooting mode.
D Access-Point Mode
Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
D Multiple Network Profiles
If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect
to the last network used. Other networks can be selected using the
Connect to PC > Network settings option in the setup menu.
364 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting to Smart Devices
To connect to the camera from a smartphone or tablet (below,
“smart device”), download the SnapBridge app.
The SnapBridge App
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections
between the camera and smart devices.
The SnapBridge app is available free
of charge from the Apple App Store®
and on Google Play™. Visit the Nikon
website for the latest SnapBridge
news.
What SnapBridge Can Do for You
Using the SnapBridge app, you can:
• Download pictures from the camera
Download existing pictures or download new pictures as they
are taken.
• Control the camera remotely (remote photography)
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
For details, see the SnapBridge app online help:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 365
Wireless Connections
Using the SnapBridge app, you can connect via Wi-Fi (0 367) or
Bluetooth (0 373). Connecting the camera and smart device via
the SnapBridge app allows you to set the camera clock and
update location data using information provided by the smart
device.
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
366 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
Follow the steps below to connect to the camera via Wi-Fi.
D Before Connecting
Before connecting, enable Wi-Fi on the smart device (for details, see
the documentation provided with the device), check that there is
space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the
batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent
the devices turning off unexpectedly.
1 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched
the app, tap Connect to camera and
proceed to Step 2.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 367
If you have launched the app before, open the tab and tap
> Wi-Fi mode before proceeding to Step 3.
1
2
3
2 Smart device: Choose the camera and connection type.
When prompted to choose the camera type, tap mirrorless
camera and then tap Wi-Fi connection.
2
1
368 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3 Camera/Smart device: Turn the camera on.
The smart device will instruct you to
ready the camera. Turn the camera on.
Do NOT tap Next until you have
completed Step 4.
4 Camera: Enable Wi-Fi.
Select Connect to smart device >
Wi-Fi connection in the setup menu,
then highlight Establish Wi-Fi
connection and press J.
The camera SSID and password will be
displayed.
D Enabling Wi-Fi
You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting
Wi-Fi connection > Establish Wi-Fi
conn. with smart device in the i menu
for shooting mode.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 369
5 Smart device: Tap Next.
Tap Next once you have enabled Wi-Fi
on the camera as described in the
preceeding step.
6 Smart device: Tap View options.
After reading the instructions
displayed by the smart device, tap
Open the device settings app.
• Android devices: Wi-Fi settings will be
displayed.
• iOS devices: The “Settings” app will
launch. Tap < Settings to open the
“Settings” app. Next, scroll up and
tap Wi-Fi, which you’ll find near the
top of the settings list.
370 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
7 Smart device: Enter the camera SSID and password.
Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in
Step 4.
Android device
(actual displays
may differ)
iOS device
(actual displays
may differ)
You will not be required to enter the password when next you
connect to the camera.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 371
8 Smart device: Return to the SnapBridge app.
After a Wi-Fi connection is
established, Wi-Fi mode options will
be displayed. See online help for
information on using the SnapBridge
app.
D Ending Wi-Fi Connections
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap . When
the icon changes to , tap and select
Exit Wi-Fi mode.
372 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting via Bluetooth
For information on pairing the camera and smart device when
connecting for the first time, see “Connecting for the First Time:
Pairing”, below. For information on connecting once pairing is
complete, see “Connecting to a Paired Device” (0 385).
❚❚ Connecting for the First Time: Pairing
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need
to pair the camera and smart device as described below. See
“Android”, below, if you are using an Android device, or “iOS”
(0 379) for information on pairing with iOS devices.
D Before Pairing
Before beginning pairing, enable Bluetooth on the smart device (for
details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that
there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that
the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to
prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
Android
Follow the steps below to pair the camera with an Android
device.
1 Camera: Ready the camera.
Select Connect to smart device >
Pairing (Bluetooth) in the setup
menu, then highlight Start pairing
and press J…
…to display the camera name.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 373
2 Android device: Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched
the app, tap Connect to camera and
proceed to Step 3.
If you have launched the app before,
open the tab and tap Connect to
camera.
374 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3 Android device: Tap mirrorless camera to display connection
options and then tap Pairing (Bluetooth).
1
2
Note: This step will not be required the next time the devices
are paired.
Note: You must enable location services when using
Bluetooth. Be sure to grant location access if prompted.
4 Android device: Choose the camera.
Tap the camera name.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 375
5 Camera/Android device: Check the authentication code.
Confirm that the camera and Android device display the
same authentication code (circled in the illustration).
376 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6 Camera/Android device: Initiate pairing.
Camera: Press J.
Android device: Tap the button indicated
in the illustration (the label may differ
depending on the version of Android
you are using).
D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera
and tapping the button on the Android device, pairing will fail and
an error will be displayed.
• Camera: Press J and return to Step 1.
• Android device: Tap OK and return to Step 2.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 377
7 Camera/Android device: Follow the on-screen instructions.
Camera: Press J. The camera will
display a message stating that the
devices are connected.
Android device: Pairing is complete. Tap OK to exit to the
tab.
D Pairing for the First Time
The first time you pair the Android device with a camera after
installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto
link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization)
options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings
can be accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab.
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge
app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (0 385).
D Ending Bluetooth Connections
To end the connection to the smart device, select Disable for Connect
to smart device > Pairing (Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in
the camera setup menu.
378 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
iOS
Follow the steps below to pair the camera with an iOS device. For
information on Android devices, see “Android” (0 373).
1 Camera: Ready the camera.
Select Connect to smart device >
Pairing (Bluetooth) in the setup
menu, then highlight Start pairing
and press J…
…to display the camera name.
2 iOS device: Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched
the app, tap Connect to camera and
proceed to Step 3.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 379
If you have launched the app before,
open the tab and tap Connect to
camera.
3 iOS device: Tap mirrorless camera to display connection
options and then tap Pairing (Bluetooth).
1
2
Note: This step will not be required the next time the devices
are paired.
Note: You must enable location services when using
Bluetooth. Be sure to grant location access if prompted.
380 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
4 iOS device: Choose the camera.
Tap the camera name.
5 iOS device: Read the instructions.
Read the pairing instructions carefully
and tap Understood.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 381
6 iOS device: Select an accessory.
When prompted to select an
accessory, tap the camera name
again.
382 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
7 Camera/iOS device: Initiate pairing.
Camera: Press J.
iOS device: Tap the button indicated in
the illustration (the label may differ
depending on the version of iOS you
are using).
D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera
and tapping the button on the iOS device, pairing will fail and an
error will be displayed.
• Camera: Press J and return to Step 1.
• iOS device: Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not
running in the background, then open the iOS “Settings” app and
request iOS to “forget” the camera as shown in the illustration
before returning to Step 1.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 383
8 Camera/iOS device: Follow the on-screen instructions.
Camera: Press J. The camera will
display a message stating that the
devices are connected.
iOS device: Pairing is complete. Tap OK to exit to the
tab.
D Pairing for the First Time
The first time you pair the iOS device with a camera after installing
the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto
upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This
prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be
accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab.
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge
app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (0 385).
D Ending Bluetooth Connections
To end the connection to the smart device, select Disable for Connect
to smart device > Pairing (Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in
the camera setup menu.
384 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
❚❚ Connecting to a Paired Device
Connecting to a smart device that has already been paired with
the camera is quick and easy.
1 Camera: Enable Bluetooth.
In the setup menu, select Connect to
smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth
connection, then highlight Enable
and press J.
2 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app.
A Bluetooth connection will be
established automatically.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 385
Troubleshooting
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be
found in the app’s online help, which can be viewed at:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility or
Camera Control Pro 2, see the online help for the application in
question.
Problem
Solution
Check settings for the host computer or
The camera displays a
wireless router and adjust camera
TCP/IP error.
settings appropriately.
The camera displays a
Confirm that the memory card is
“no memory card” error. correctly inserted.
Upload is interrupted
Upload will resume if the camera is
and fails to resume.
turned off and then on again.
If Auto is selected for Channel, choose
Manual and select the channel
manually.
The connection is
If the camera is connected to a
unreliable.
computer in infrastructure mode, check
that the router is set to a channel
between 1 and 8.
386 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
0
317
32
360
315
317
Connecting to Other Devices
Expand your photographic horizons by connecting the camera
to other devices via USB or HDMI.
Connecting to Computers Via USB
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a
computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the
computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized. For
information on establishing wireless connections to computers,
see “Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi” (0 347) in
“Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart
Devices”.
Connecting to Other Devices 387
Installing ViewNX-i
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation
(existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as
earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet
connection is required. For system requirements and other
information, see the Nikon website for your region.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
D Capture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
388 Connecting to Other Devices
Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
1 Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
D Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
Connecting to Other Devices 389
2 Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a
message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2). If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start
automatically, launch ViewNX-i and click the “Import” icon.
D Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program. A program
selection dialog will be displayed;
select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click .
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may
display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected. Tap or click the
dialog and then tap or click
Nikon Transfer 2 to select
Nikon Transfer 2.
D macOS/OS X
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the
camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an
application that comes with macOS or OS X) and select
Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is
detected.
390 Connecting to Other Devices
3 Click Start Transfer.
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Click Start Transfer
D Transferring Movies
Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is
inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies
being deleted without being transferred.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
4 Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when
transfer is complete.
Connecting to Other Devices 391
Connecting to Printers
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
connected directly to the camera using the supplied USB cable.
When connecting the cable, do not use force or attempt to insert
the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen
will be displayed, followed by a PictBridge playback display.
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) cannot be
selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created
using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
D Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged. When taking photographs to be
printed via direct USB connection, set Color space to sRGB.
D USB Hubs
Operation is not guaranteed if the camera and printer are connected
via a USB hub.
D See Also
See “Error Messages“ (0 414) for information on what to do if an error
occurs during printing.
392 Connecting to Other Devices
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Tap the X button to
zoom in on the current frame (press K to exit zoom). To view
six pictures at a time, tap the W button. Use the multi
selector to highlight pictures, or tap the X button to display
the highlighted picture full frame.
2 Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
• Page size: Choose a page size.
• No. of copies: This option is listed only when pictures are
printed one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of
copies (maximum 99).
• Border: Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
• Print date: Choose whether to print the dates of recording on
photos.
• Cropping: This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog will be
displayed; tap X to increase the size of the crop, W to
decrease, and use the multi selector to position the crop.
Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at
large sizes.
Connecting to Other Devices 393
3 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
printing before all copies have been printed, press J.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1 Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing. Press 4 or 2 to scroll
through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, touch and hold the X button) and press 1 or 3 to
choose the number of prints. To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero.
• Index print: Create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the
memory card. Note that if the memory card contains more
than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
A warning will be displayed if the page size selected in
Step 3 is too small for an index print.
3 Adjust printing options.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 of “Printing
Pictures One at a Time” (0 393).
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
printing before all copies have been printed, press J.
394 Connecting to Other Devices
Connecting to HDMI Devices
The camera can be connected to high-definition video devices
using a third-party HDMI cable (type D). Always turn the camera
off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Connect to camera
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
❚❚ Connecting to HDMI TVs
After connecting the camera to an HDMI television or other
display, tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the
camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will
be displayed on the television screen. Volume can be adjusted
using television controls; the camera controls cannot be used.
Connecting to Other Devices 395
Connecting to Other HDMI Devices
Use the HDMI option in the setup menu
to adjust settings for HDMI output.
• Output Resolution: Choose the format for
images output to the HDMI device. If
Auto is selected, the camera will
automatically select the appropriate
format.
• Output range: Auto is recommended in most situations. If the
camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited
range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to
235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a loss of
detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed out” or
too bright.
D HDMI Output
HDMI output is not available while movies are being recorded at movie
frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080
slow-motion or when the camera is connected to a computer running
Camera Control Pro 2.
396 Connecting to Other Devices
On-Camera Flash Photography
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
You can take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera
accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted
on the camera as described in “Using an
On-Camera Flash” (0 398).
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote
flash units using wireless flash control
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL) as
described in “Remote Flash
Photography” (0 401).
On-Camera Flash Photography 397
Using an On-Camera Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the
camera and take photographs using the flash.
1 Mount the unit on the accessory
shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit
for details.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will
be displayed when charging is complete.
3 Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash control mode (0 400) and flash mode
(0 126).
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5 Take pictures.
398 On-Camera Flash Photography
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
D i-TTL Flash Control
When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is mounted on the camera and set to TTL, it will operate in i-TTL
mode, employing monitor preflashes for flash photography using i-TTL
balanced fill-flash and the like. i-TTL flash control is not available with
flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting System.
D Studio Strobe Lighting
Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with large studio strobe lighting
units, as they will not sync correctly.
On-Camera Flash Photography 399
Flash Control Mode
When an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash
unit is mounted on the camera, the
Flash control mode (built-in) option
displayed when Flash control is selected
in the photo shooting menu is replaced
by Flash control mode (external).
In modes P, S, A, and M, this option can be used to choose the
flash control mode and adjust the flash level and other flash
settings. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using
flash unit controls.
• TTL: Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions.
• Manual: Choose the flash level (Manual output amount)
manually.
400 On-Camera Flash Photography
Remote Flash Photography
About Remote Flash Photography
The camera can be used with one or more remote flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using
a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “OnCamera Flash Photography” (0 397).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected
to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote flash
units by f. For more information on f, see the manual provided with
the flash unit.
Remote Flash Photography 401
Controlling Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via
optical signals from an optional flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe and
functioning as a master flash (optical AWL).
For information on compatible flash units, see
“The Nikon Creative Lighting System” (0 426). If the flash unit in
question is an SB-500, settings can be adjusted from the camera
(see below); otherwise settings must be adjusted using flash unit
controls as described in the documentation provided with the
unit. For information on flash placement and other topics, see
the documentation provided with the flash units. The built-in
flash unit cannot be used as a master flash.
Using the SB-500
When an optional SB-500 flash unit is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe,
Wireless flash options will appear
under Flash control in the photo
shooting menu. Selecting Optical AWL
in the Wireless flash options menu
enables group flash photography.
1 C: Select Group flash options.
Highlight Group flash options in the
flash control display and press 2.
402 Remote Flash Photography
2 C: Adjust settings for the master
flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
flash level for the master flash and the
flash units in each group:
• TTL: i-TTL flash control
• qA: Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash
units)
• M: Choose the flash level manually
• – – (off): The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be
adjusted
Set the master flash to channel 3.
3 f: Set the remote flash units to channel 3.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A or B) for each remote flash unit. Although
there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may
be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With
more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash
units will interfere with performance.
Remote Flash Photography 403
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the test button
on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the
units are functioning normally.
6 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
D Note: Remote Flash Photography
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections
from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode)
or the photocells on the remote flash units (qA mode), as this may
interfere with exposure. To prevent low-intensity timing flashes
emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs taken at
short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high fnumbers). After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and
view the results in the camera display.
404 Remote Flash Photography
Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by
following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your
retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
1
Check the common problems listed in the following sections:
• “Problems and Solutions” (0 406)
• “Indicators and Error Messages” (0 412)
2
Turn the camera off and remove the battery. After waiting for about a minute,
re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
D If you have just finished shooting, wait at least a minute before removing the
battery, as the camera may still be writing data to the memory card.
STEP
3
Search Nikon websites.
For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region (0 xxviii).
To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com
STEP
4
Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
STEP
STEP
D Restoring Default Settings
Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features
may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or
features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings
using the Reset all settings item in the setup menu (0 322). Note,
however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and
other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings
cannot be restored.
Troubleshooting 405
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery. Note that although any data currently
being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will
not be affected by removing the battery.
The camera takes time to turn off: The camera is performing an image sensor
check. Do not remove the battery until the camera has turned off.
The viewfinder or monitor does not turn on:
• Choose a different monitor mode using the monitor mode button.
• Dust, lint, or other foreign matter on the eye sensor may prevent it
functioning normally. Clean the eye sensor with a blower.
The viewfinder is out of focus: Rotate the diopter adjustment control to focus
the viewfinder. If this does not correct the problem, select AF-S, singlepoint AF, and the center focus point, and then frame a high-contrast
subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter
adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder.
The displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom
Setting c3 (Power off delay).
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
The shutter-release is disabled:
• The memory card is full.
• The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
• Mode S selected after Bulb or Time is chosen for shutter speed in mode M.
• Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock in the setup
menu and no memory card is inserted.
406 Troubleshooting
The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom
Setting d3 (Exposure delay mode).
Only one shot is taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed in continuous
release modes:
• Turn HDR off.
• If the built-in flash is used with continuous low-speed or continuous
high-speed selected for release mode, only one picture will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Selecting continuous
high-speed (extended) enables burst photography and disables the
built-in flash.
Photos are out of focus: To focus using autofocus, select AF-A, AF-S, AF-C, or AF-F
for focus mode. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (0 53),
use manual focus or focus lock.
Beeps do not sound if:
• Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off in the setup menu.
• AF-C is selected for focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is
shooting using AF-C.
• On is selected for Silent photography in the photo shooting menu.
• The camera is in movie mode.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available: A flash in use. Flash sync speed
can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when
using compatible flash units, choose 1/200 s (Auto FP) to access the full
range of shutter speeds.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway: When AF-C is
selected for focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting
using AF-C, focus can be locked by pressing the A (L) button.
The focus point cannot be changed: Focus-point selection is unavailable in
auto-area AF; choose another AF-area mode.
The camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off.
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview
shown in the display: To preview the effects of changes to settings that
affect exposure and color, select On for Custom Setting d7 (Apply
settings to live view). Note that changes to Monitor brightness and
Viewfinder brightness have no effect on images recorded with the
camera.
Troubleshooting 407
Flicker or banding appears in movie mode: Select Flicker reduction in the
movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency
of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear in the view through the lens: The shot is being
framed under flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief
duration.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean the front and rear lens elements. If the
problem persists, clean the image sensor as described in “Cleaning the
Image Sensor” (0 438) or consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Bokeh is irregular: With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may
notice irregularities in how bokeh is shaped. The effect can be mitigated
by choosing slower shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start: Shooting may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if the ambient
temperature is high or the camera has been used extensively for burst
shooting, movie recording, or the like. If you are unable to shoot because
the camera has overheated, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then
try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting: “Noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you
zoom in on the view through the lens. Randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during shooting; turn the
camera off when it is not in use. At high ISO sensitivities, noise may
become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when
the camera temperature is elevated. Note that the distribution of noise
in the display may differ from that in the final picture. To reduce noise,
adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active
D-Lighting.
408 Troubleshooting
The camera cannot measure white balance: The subject is too dark or too bright.
Images cannot be selected as source for preset white balance: The images in
question were created with a different model of camera.
White balance bracketing is unavailable:
• An NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option is selected for image
quality.
• Multiple exposure or HDR (high dynamic range) photography is on.
The effects of Picture Controls differ from image to image: Auto is selected for Set
Picture Control, a Picture Control based on Auto is selected, or A (auto)
is selected for Quick sharp, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results
over a series of photographs, choose another setting.
Metering cannot be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect.
Exposure compensation cannot be used: In mode M, exposure compensation
affects only the display in the exposure indicator; shutter speed and
aperture are not affected.
Noise (colored splotches or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable
long exposure noise reduction.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• Select On for Custom Setting a8 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator).
• The illuminator does not light in movie mode.
• The illuminator does not light in the following focus modes: AF-C
(including when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C)
and MF.
Sound is not recorded with movies:
• Microphone off is selected for Microphone sensitivity in the movie
shooting menu.
• Manual is selected for Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting
menu and a low value is selected.
Troubleshooting 409
Playback
NEF (RAW) images are not played back: The pictures were taken at image
qualities of NEF + JPEG.
The camera does not display pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures
recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder.
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
• The photos are displayed in image review.
• The camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
Pictures cannot be deleted:
• The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
• The pictures are protected.
Pictures cannot be retouched: The picture cannot be edited with this camera.
The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images: Select All
for Playback folder.
Pictures cannot be printed: NEF (RAW) photos cannot be printed by direct
USB connection. Transfer the photos to a computer and print them using
Capture NX-D. NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG format using the
NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices: Confirm that an HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected.
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:
• Check that the HDMI cable is correctly connected.
• Check again after selecting Reset all settings in the setup menu.
Computers do not display NEF (RAW) images the same way as the camera does: Thirdparty software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active
D-Lighting, vignette control, or the like. Use Capture NX-D or ViewNX-i.
Pictures cannot be transferred to a computer: The computer operating system is
not compatible with the camera or image transfer software. Use a card
reader or card slot to copy the pictures to a computer.
410 Troubleshooting
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the camera
setup menu.
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu.
• Confirm that Wi-Fi has been enabled using the Connect to smart
device > Wi-Fi connection option in the setup menu.
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
The camera cannot connect to wireless printers and other wireless devices: This
camera can connect only to computers and smart devices.
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct: The camera clock is less accurate than
most watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against
more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Some menu items cannot be selected: Some options are not available at
certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted.
The camera does not respond to the ML-L7 remote control:
• The optional ML-L7 remote control has not established a connection to
the camera. Press the power button on the remote control. If L does not
appear in the camera shooting display, pair the camera with the
remote control again.
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Wireless remote (ML-L7)
options > Wireless remote connection in the setup menu.
• In the setup menu, confirm that: Disable is selected for Airplane
mode, Disable is selected for Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection, and Disable is selected for
Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection.
The camera cannot be paired with the ML-L7 remote control: Confirm that Disable
is selected for Airplane mode in the setup menu.
Troubleshooting 411
Indicators and Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the camera display.
Indicators
The following indicators appear in the camera display:
Indicator
H
H
(flashes)
F––
Bulb
(flashes)
Time
(flashes)
412 Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
Ready a fully-charged spare
Low battery.
battery.
Battery exhausted.
Recharge or replace battery.
Battery info
Battery cannot be used.
unavailable.
Contact Nikon-authorized
Battery not supported. service representative.
Battery temperature
Remove battery and wait for it
high.
to cool.
Ensure that the lens is correctly
attached and that retractable
lenses are extended. This
Lens is not correctly
indicator is also displayed
attached.
when a non-CPU lens is
attached via a mount adapter,
but in this case no action need
be taken.
Bulb selected in mode S.
Time selected in mode S.
Change shutter speed or select
mode M.
Indicator
c
(flashes)
Problem
Built-in or optional flash
has fired full power;
photo may be
underexposed.
Subjects appear dark
and underexposed.
Solution
Check photo in display; if
underexposed, adjust settings
and try again.
Use built-in or optional flash.
• Decrease ISO sensitivity.
• Use optional ND filter. In
mode:
Subject too bright;
S Increase shutter speed
photo will be
A Choose a smaller aperture
overexposed.
(Exposure
(higher f-number)
indicators and
• 4 Choose another shooting
shutter speed or
mode
aperture display
• Increase ISO sensitivity.
flash)
• Use built-in or optional flash.
Subject too dark; photo In mode:
will be underexposed.
S Lower shutter speed
A Choose larger aperture
(lower f-number)
Memory insufficient to • Reduce quality or size.
record further pictures • Delete pictures after copying
Full
at current settings, or
important images to
(flashes)
camera has run out of
computer or other device.
file or folder numbers. • Insert new memory card.
Release shutter. If error persists
Err
or appears frequently, consult
Camera malfunction.
(flashes)
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Troubleshooting 413
Error Messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
Message
Problem
Solution
Camera cannot
Turn camera off and confirm
detect memory card. that card is correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon-approved card.
• If error persists after card has
been repeatedly ejected and
Error accessing
reinserted, card may be
memory card.
damaged. Contact retailer or
Cannot access this
memory card.
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Insert another card.
Delete files or insert new
Unable to create new memory card after copying
folder.
important pictures to
computer or other device.
Memory card is
The memory card is
locked.
Slide the lock switch to the
write-protected
Slide lock to “write”
“write” position (0 35).
(“locked”).
position.
This card is not
Memory card has not
Format memory card or insert
formatted.
been formatted for
new memory card.
Format the card.
use in camera.
Use card that supports
Recording
Memory card does required write speed or
interrupted.
not support required change option selected for
Please wait.
movie write speed. Frame size/frame rate in
movie shooting menu.
Unable to start live
view. Please wait.
Wait for the internal circuits to
The camera is too The internal
temperature of the cool before resuming
hot. It cannot be
shooting.
used until it cools. camera is high.
Please wait. Camera
will turn itself off.
No memory card.
414 Troubleshooting
Message
Problem
No viewable pictures
on memory card.
Folder contains no
No viewable pictures
images.
in folder(s) selected
for playback.
File was edited on
computer or does
Cannot display this
not comply with DCF
file.
standards, or file is
corrupt.
Cannot select this Selected picture
file.
cannot be retouched.
Solution
Insert memory card containing
viewable pictures.
Use Playback folder item in
playback menu to select folder
containing viewable pictures.
File cannot be viewed on
camera.
Pictures created with other
devices cannot be retouched.
• Movies created with other
devices cannot be edited.
This movie cannot Selected movie
be edited.
cannot be edited.
• Movies must be at least two
seconds long.
Check printer. To resume,
Check printer.
Printer error.
select Continue (if available) *.
Paper in printer is not Insert paper of correct size and
Check paper.
of selected size.
select Continue *.
Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select
Paper jam.
printer.
Continue *.
Printer is out of
Insert paper of selected size
Out of paper.
paper.
and select Continue *.
Check ink. To resume, select
Check ink supply.
Ink error.
Continue *.
Replace ink and select
Out of ink.
Printer is out of ink.
Continue *.
* See printer manual for more information.
Troubleshooting 415
Technical Notes
Compatible Lenses
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
Confirm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
A Compatible F Mount Lenses
F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ
mount adapter.
• Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount
cameras and on any restrictions that may apply can be found in
Compatible F Mount Lenses, available from the Nikon Download Center:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/491/FTZ.html
416 Technical Notes
The Camera Display
Refer to this section for information on the indicators in the
camera display (monitor and viewfinder). For illustrative
purposes, the displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Monitor: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in photo mode.
1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
12 13 14
15
16
17
18
19
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
20
34 33 32
1
2
3
4
5
6
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Shooting mode ............................. 71
Flexible program indicator ......... 72
User setting mode ........................ 78
AF-area brackets ........................... 54
Flash mode...................................104
Interval timer indicator .............235
“Clock not set” indicator ............. 39
“No memory card”
indicator ..................................32, 35
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Release mode .............................. 131
Focus point...............................42, 54
Focus mode...................51, 212, 258
AF-area mode...............54, 212, 258
Active D-Lighting ..... 129, 205, 256
Picture Control .......... 112, 200, 256
Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 314
Airplane mode ............................ 313
Technical Notes 417
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
White balance .....63, 116, 194, 255
Image size............................ 124, 190
Image quality ..................... 122, 190
i icon.......................................16, 24
Exposure bracketing
indicator...................................... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
Number of shots remaining in
exposure bracketing
sequence..................................... 214
Number of shots remaining in
white balance bracketing
sequence..................................... 218
Number of shots remaining in
ADL bracketing sequence....... 221
HDR exposure differential ........ 230
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) .................................... 223
Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
Flash-ready indicator................. 429
“k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .....................................34
418 Technical Notes
23 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
24 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 128
Remote-control connection
indicator...................................... 319
25 ISO sensitivity.................................96
26 ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .....97
27 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
28 Flash compensation indicator.... 107
29 Aperture ..........................................73
30 Subject tracking.............................58
31 Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
32 FV lock indicator ......................... 108
33 Metering..................... 127, 208, 258
34 Focus indicator...............................61
35 Battery indicator............................34
36 Flicker detection......................... 208
37 Shutter type................................. 275
Silent photography..............67, 252
38 Exposure delay mode................ 274
39 Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
40 Optical VR indicator.......... 135, 212
41 Touch shooting ....................... 12, 59
42 Live view preview indicator..... 277
43 Temperature warning ............... 419
D Temperature Warnings
If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning
will be displayed together with a count-down timer (the timer turns
red when the thirty second mark is reached). In some cases, the timer
may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on. When the
timer reaches zero, the shooting display will turn off automatically to
protect the camera’s internal circuits.
Technical Notes 419
❚❚ The Information Display
1 2 3
4
5
16
15
6
14
7
13
8
12
9
11
10
Shooting mode ..............................71
Flexible program indicator..........72
User setting mode.........................78
Shutter speed ..........................72, 74
Aperture...........................................73
Exposure bracketing
indicator...................................... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
7 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .....................................34
8 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
1
2
3
4
5
6
420 Technical Notes
9 Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
WB bracketing....................... 218
ADL bracketing..................... 221
10 i icon ...................................... 16, 24
11 ISO sensitivity.................................96
12 ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .....97
13 FV lock indicator ......................... 108
14 Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
15 Flash compensation indicator.... 107
16 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
Exposure compensation
value ...............................................98
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25
38
37
36
35
26
27
28
34
33
32
29
30
31
17 Bluetooth connection
indicator ......................................314
Airplane mode.............................313
18 Wi-Fi connection indicator .......128
Remote-control connection
indicator ......................................319
19 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator ......................................206
20 Shutter type .................................275
Silent photography ............. 67, 252
21 Exposure delay mode ................274
22 Interval timer indicator .............235
“Clock not set” indicator ............. 39
23 Flash control mode.....................209
24 “Beep” indicator ..........................312
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Battery indicator ........................... 34
Built-in Wi-Fi ................................ 128
Release mode .............................. 131
AF-area mode...............54, 212, 258
Focus mode...................51, 212, 258
Optical VR............................ 135, 212
Active D-Lighting ..... 129, 205, 256
Metering ..................... 127, 208, 258
Image size............................ 124, 190
White balance......63, 116, 194, 255
Picture Control .......... 112, 200, 256
Image quality ..................... 122, 190
Flash mode................................... 104
Temperature warning................ 419
Technical Notes 421
The Monitor: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in movie mode.
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
7
6
5
1 Recording indicator ......................44 6
“No movie” indicator ....................45 7
2 Frame size and rate/image
8
quality................................. 139, 254 9
3 Time remaining..............................44 10
4 File name ...................................... 254
5 Release mode
(still photography).................... 258
422 Technical Notes
Sound level .................................. 141
Microphone sensitivity .... 141, 259
Frequency response .................. 260
Electronic VR indicator..... 143, 259
Wind noise reduction................ 260
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in photo
mode.
1
2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13
14
41
40
39
15
16
17
38
37
36
35
18
19
34 33 31 29 28
32 30
27
Battery indicator ........................... 34
Live view preview indicator .....277
Optical VR indicator ..........135, 212
Flash mode...................................104
Release mode ..............................131
Focus mode.................. 51, 212, 258
AF-area mode .............. 54, 212, 258
Active D-Lighting
indicator ....................129, 205, 256
9 Picture Control
indicator ....................112, 200, 256
10 White balance..... 63, 116, 194, 255
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
25 23
26 24
22
20
21
11 Image quality ..................... 122, 190
12 Image size............................ 124, 190
13 Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 314
Airplane mode ............................ 313
14 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 128
Remote-control connection
indicator...................................... 319
15 Focus point...............................42, 54
16 Flicker detection ......................... 208
17 Subject tracking............................ 58
Technical Notes 423
18 Exposure bracketing indicator ... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
19 Number of shots remaining in
exposure bracketing
sequence..................................... 214
Number of shots remaining in
white balance bracketing
sequence..................................... 218
Number of shots remaining in
ADL bracketing sequence....... 221
HDR exposure differential ........ 230
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) .................................... 223
20 Flash-ready indicator................. 429
21 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over
1000 exposures)...........................34
22 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
23 ISO sensitivity .................................96
24 ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator......97
25 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
424 Technical Notes
26 Flash compensation indicator.... 107
27 Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
28 Aperture ..........................................73
29 Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
30 Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
31 User setting mode.........................78
32 Flexible program indicator..........72
33 Shooting mode..............................71
34 Metering..................... 127, 208, 258
35 Focus indicator...............................61
36 FV lock indicator ......................... 108
37 Exposure delay mode................ 274
38 Shutter type................................. 275
Silent photography..............67, 252
39 Interval timer indicator............. 235
“Clock not set” indicator..............39
“No memory card”
indicator.................................. 32, 35
40 AF-area brackets............................54
41 Temperature warning ............... 419
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in movie
mode.
1
2
3
10
9
8
7
6
4
5
1 Frame size and rate/image
quality.................................139, 254
2 File name ......................................189
3 Recording indicator...................... 44
“No movie” indicator.................... 45
4 Time remaining ............................. 44
5 Release mode
(still photography).................... 258
6 Sound level .................................. 141
7 Microphone sensitivity..... 141, 259
8 Frequency response................... 260
9 Wind noise reduction ................ 260
10 Electronic VR indicator ..... 143, 259
Technical Notes 425
The Nikon Creative Lighting System
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers
improved communication between the camera and compatible
flash units for improved flash photography.
CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
SB-R200
✔ ✔2 ✔ — — ✔ ✔
✔
—
✔3
✔3
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔ — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔4 — — ✔4 ✔4
— — — — — — —
SB-300
✔2
SB-400
✔2
SB-500
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
SU-800
✔
SB-600
SB-910
SB-900
SB-800
✔
SB-700
SB-5000
i-TTL balanced fill
flash 1
Standard i-TTL fill
flash
qA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
Distance-priority
GN
manual
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL
Single flash
426 Technical Notes
SB-R200
✔ — — ✔5 — — —
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — —
✔6
✔6
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — —
✔ ✔ ✔ — — — —
—
—
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
—
— — ✔ — — — —
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔9
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔4
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
SB-300
—
SB-400
✔
SU-800
✔ — ✔4 ✔ — — —
✔ — ✔4 — — — —
SB-500
✔
✔
SB-600
SB-910
SB-900
SB-800
✔
✔
SB-700
SB-5000
Remote
Master
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
qA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
Auto aperture/
qA/A
Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Lighting
Color information communication
(flash)
Color information communication
(LED light)
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7
FV lock 8
Red-eye reduction
Camera modeling illumination
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
Technical Notes 427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected with flash unit.
qA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
Can only be selected using the camera Flash control option.
Available only during close-up photography.
Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash.
Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is set to emit monitor pre-flashes in
qA or A flash control mode.
9 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as
a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is
not equipped with a flash.
D Flash Compensation
In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash
compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the camera
Flash control option is added to the flash compensation selected with
the Flash compensation option in the photo shooting menu.
428 Technical Notes
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. Note that this camera is not included in the “digital SLR”
category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved
at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator (c)
flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or
non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the
photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot
and view the results in the camera display.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
100
4
200
5
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
400
800
1600
3200
5.6
7.1
8
10
6400
11
12800
13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
AF-assist illumination is provided by the camera, not the flash unit; the
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400
do, however, provide red-eye reduction.
Noise in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with
an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to
the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between
the camera and the power pack.
Technical Notes 429
D Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
SB-80DX,
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-50DX, SB-23, SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-26, SB-25,
SB-29, SB-21B, SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-24
SB-15
SB-29S
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
✔
—
✔
M Manual
✔
✔
✔
G Repeating flash
✔
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync 2
✔
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
2 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
Flash unit
D FV Lock
The area metered for FV lock is as follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting)
Flash mode
i-TTL
qA
i-TTL
qA
A
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
A Studio Strobe Lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that
shots are easier to frame, select Off for Custom Setting d7 (Apply
settings to live view).
430 Technical Notes
Other Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
Power sources • EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Additional EN-EL25
batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon
service representatives.
• MH-32 Battery Charger: The MH-32 can be used to recharge
EN-EL25 batteries.
• EH-73P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-73P can be used to
charge EN-EL25 batteries inserted in the camera (the
battery only charges when the camera is off ).
Filters
• Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, avoid using filters when the
subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright
light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended if matrix
metering fails to produce the desired results for filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual
for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the in-focus indicator (I).
USB cables
UC-E21 USB cable: A USB cable with a Micro-B connector for
connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to the USB device.
Hot shoe
AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter: Mount the AS-15 on the camera
adapters
hot shoe to connect studio strobe lights or other flash
equipment via a sync terminal.
Accessory shoe BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory
covers
shoe when no flash unit is attached.
Body caps
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the
camera when a lens is not in place.
Technical Notes 431
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
Mount
adapters
Microphones
DK-30 Rubber Eyecup: The DK-30 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
Remove
Replace
FTZ Mount Adapter: An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount
lenses to be used with digital cameras that support
interchangeable Z mount lenses. The picture angle is
equivalent to that of a lens with a 35 mm formatequivalent focal length approximately 1.5 times longer.
• For information on attaching, removing, maintaining,
and using FTZ mount adapters, refer to the mount
adapter manual.
• ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound and reduce the
chance of picking up equipment noise (such as the
sounds produced by the lens during autofocus).
• ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: Use this wireless Bluetooth
microphone for off-camera recording.
432 Technical Notes
Remote
controls
ML-L7 Remote Control: Once paired with the camera, the
ML-L7 can be used to take photographs and record
movies remotely.
• Use the Wireless remote (ML-L7) options > Save
wireless remote controller option in the camera setup
menu to pair the camera with the remote.
• The camera can be paired with only one remote at a
time. If paired successively with more than one remote,
the camera will respond only to the remote with which
it was last paired.
• To reactivate the camera after the standby timer has
expired and the monitor and viewfinder displays have
turned off, turn the remote control on and press and
hold the remote-control shutter-release or movierecord button.
• For more information, see the remote control manual or
the section on the setup menu Wireless remote
(ML-L7) options item in the “Menu Guide” chapter of
the Reference Manual.
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest
information.
Charging AC Adapters
When inserted in the camera, EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion
batteries will charge while the camera is connected to an
optional EH-73P charging AC adapter. An exhausted battery will
fully charge in about 3 hours and 30 minutes. Note that in
countries or regions where required, charging AC adapters are
supplied with a plug adapter attached; the shape of the plug
adapter varies with the country of sale.
1 Insert the EN-EL25 into the camera
(0 32).
Technical Notes 433
2 After confirming that the camera is off, connect the
charging AC adapter using the USB cable supplied with the
camera and plug the adapter in. Use only a UC-E21 USB
cable and an EH-73P charging adapter; do not use other
charging adapters or third-party USB-AC adapters or
smartphone chargers. Insert the plug or plug adapter
straight into the socket rather than at an angle, and
observe the same precaution when unplugging the
charging AC adapter.
Charge lamp
Outlet
EH-73P charging
AC adapter
The camera charge lamp lights amber while charging is in
progress and turns off when charging is complete. Note that
although the camera can be used while connected, the
battery will not charge and the camera will not draw power
from the charging AC adapter while the camera is on.
3 Unplug and disconnect the charging AC adapter when
charging is complete.
434 Technical Notes
D The Charge Lamp
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for
example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of
the camera is elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30
seconds and then turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not
observe the battery charging, turn the camera on and check the
battery level.
Technical Notes 435
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
Computer
software
Smartphone
(tablet) apps
• Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase): Control the camera
remotely from a computer and save photographs
directly to the computer hard disk.
• ViewNX-i *: More than a tool for viewing and editing
photos and movies shot with Nikon digital cameras,
ViewNX-i can be used in combination with other Nikon
imaging applications to help you get the most from
your pictures. It also offers smooth access to online
services.
• Capture NX-D: Fine-tune photos shot in Nikon’s unique
NEF/NRW (RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or
TIFF (NEF/RAW processing). Capture NX-D can be used
not only with NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but also with
JPEG and TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras
for such tasks as editing tone curves and enhancing
brightness and contrast.
• Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility
is required if the camera is to be connected to a
network. Pair the camera with the computer and
download pictures via Wi-Fi.
• Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the
latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may not support the camera.
SnapBridge: Download photos and movies from the
camera to your smart device via a wireless connection.
• The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App
Store® and on Google Play™.
• Visit our website for the latest information on the
SnapBridge app.
436 Technical Notes
Caring for the Camera
Learn how to store, clean, and care for your camera.
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%,
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios, or
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
• Camera body: Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe
gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the
beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important:
Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause
damage not covered under warranty.
• Lenses, viewfinder: Glass surfaces are easily damaged. Remove
dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
• Monitor: Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
Technical Notes 437
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or
the body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and
affect your photographs. The image sensor can be cleaned as
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely
delicate and easily damaged; we recommend that manual
cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
1 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens or body cap.
2 Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign
objects are present, proceed to Step 4.
3 Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower. Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor. Dirt that cannot
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe
the sensor.
4 Replace the lens or body cap.
438 Technical Notes
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the
sensor manually (0 438) or have the sensor cleaned by authorized
Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of
foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image
options available in some imaging applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
Technical Notes 439
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation,
place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to
sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields. Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the display,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Lasers and other bright light sources: Do not direct lasers or other extremely
bright light sources toward the lens, as this could damage the camera’s
image sensor.
Turn the product off before removing the battery: Do not remove the battery
while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data
or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry.
440 Technical Notes
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
Lenses, viewfinders, and other glass elements are easily damaged. Dust
and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol
blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from glass surfaces, apply a small amount
of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the glass carefully.
Do not touch the image sensor: Under no
circumstances should you exert pressure on
the image sensor, poke it with cleaning tools,
or subject it to powerful air currents from a
blower. These actions could scratch or
otherwise damage the sensor. For
information on cleaning the image sensor, see
“Cleaning the Image Sensor” (0 438).
Image sensor
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean and be careful not to touch
them with your fingers or with tools or other objects.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
Technical Notes 441
Notes on the monitor and viewfinder: These displays are constructed with
extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no
more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays
may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or
always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images
recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. Do not
apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint can be removed with a blower. Stains can be
removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should
the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken
glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes and mouth.
Should you feel unwell or experience any of the following symptoms
while framing shots in the viewfinder, discontinue use until your
condition improves: nausea, eye pain, eye fatigue, dizziness, headache,
stiffness in your neck or shoulders, carsickness, or loss of hand-eye
coordination. The same applies should you start to feel unwell when
watching the shooting display flicker rapidly on and off during burst
photography.
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that
include bright lights or back-lit subjects.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries
and chargers:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• The battery may become hot while in use. Observe caution when
handling the battery immediately after use.
442 Technical Notes
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the
camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with
an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or
extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six
months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C to 35 °C
(41 °F to 95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The
battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
• If the charge lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem
persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your
retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
Technical Notes 443
• Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low
temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at
which it was charged.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new battery.
• Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
• Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending
on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries
on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends
to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm
place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery
may recover some of its charge.
• Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being
sure to first insulate the terminals with tape.
• Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
The charging AC adapter: Observe the precautions below when using the
charging AC adapter.
• Do not move the camera during charging. Failure to observe this
precaution could in very rare instances result in the camera showing
that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged.
Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin charging again.
• Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the adapter.
• Unplug the adapter when it is not in use.
• Do not use adapters with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
444 Technical Notes
Specifications
Nikon Z 50 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Lens mount
Lens
Compatible lenses
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
Dust-Reduction System
Storage
Image size (pixels)
Digital camera with support for
interchangeable lenses
Nikon Z mount
• Z mount NIKKOR lenses
• F mount NIKKOR lenses with mount adapter;
restrictions may apply
20.9 million
23.5 × 15.7 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon DX format)
21.51 million
Image Dust Off reference data (requires
Capture NX-D)
• DX (24×16) image area
5568 × 3712 (Large: 20.7 M)
4176 × 2784 (Medium: 11.6 M)
2784 × 1856 (Small: 5.2 M)
• 1 : 1 (16×16) image area
3712 × 3712 (Large: 13.8 M)
2784 × 2784 (Medium: 7.8 M)
1856 × 1856 (Small: 3.4 M)
• 16 : 9 (24×14) image area
5568 × 3128 (Large: 17.4 M)
4176 × 2344 (Medium: 9.8 M)
2784 × 1560 (Small: 4.3 M)
• Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame
size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
• Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame
size of 1920 × 1080: 1920 × 1080
Technical Notes 445
Storage
File format
Picture Control System
Media
File system
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Eye sensor
Monitor
Monitor
446 Technical Notes
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,
Portrait, Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture
Controls (Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday,
Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached,
Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon);
selected Picture Control can be modified;
storage for custom Picture Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC
and SDXC memory cards
DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31, PictBridge
0.99-cm/0.39-in. approx. 2360k-dot (XGA) OLED
electronic viewfinder with color balance and
auto and 7-level manual brightness controls
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Approx. 1.02× (50 mm lens at infinity, −1.0 m −1)
19.5 mm (−1.0 m −1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
−3 – +3 m −1
Automatically switches between monitor and
viewfinder displays
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1040k-dot tilting TFT
touch-sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle,
approximately 100% frame coverage, and 11level manual brightness controls
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane mechanical shutter; electronic frontcurtain shutter; electronic shutter
1/4000 – 30 s (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and
1/2 EV), bulb, time
X= 1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or
slower; Auto FP High-Speed sync supported
Single frame, low-speed continuous, highspeed continuous, high-speed continuous
(extended), self-timer
• Low-speed continuous: 1–4 fps
• High-speed continuous: 5 fps
• High-speed continuous (extended): 11 fps
Approximate maximum
frame advance rate
(measured under Nikonspecified test conditions)
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
Exposure
Metering system
Metering mode
TTL metering using camera image sensor
• Matrix metering
• Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given
to 8 mm circle in center of frame; weighting
can instead be based on average of entire
frame
• Spot metering: Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5%
of frame) centered on selected focus point
• Highlight-weighted metering
Range (ISO 100, f/2.0 lens, –4 – +17 EV
20 °C/68 °F)
Technical Notes 447
Exposure
Mode
• b: Auto, P: programmed auto with flexible
program, S: shutter-priority auto, A: aperturepriority auto, M: manual
• Scene modes: k portrait; l landscape; p child;
m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night
landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow;
d sunset; e dusk/dawn; f pet portrait;
g candlelight; j blossom; z autumn colors;
0 food
• Special effect modes: 4 night vision; V super
vivid; T pop; U photo illustration; 5 toy
camera effect; 6 miniature effect; 7 selective
color; 1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key
• U1 and U2: user settings
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and
1/2 EV) available in P, S, A, M, h, and q modes
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
ISO 100 – 51200 (choose from step sizes of 1/3
(Recommended Exposure and 1/2 EV); can also be set to approx. 1 or 2 EV
Index)
(ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto
ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High,
Normal, Low, or Off
Multiple exposure
Add, average, lighten, darken
Other options
HDR (high dynamic range), photo mode flicker
reduction
Focus
Autofocus
Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF with AF
assist
Detection range (single- −4 – +19 EV
servo AF, photo mode, ISO • Without low-light AF: −2 – +19 EV
100, f/2.0 lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
448 Technical Notes
Focus
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); AF mode autoswitch (AF-A; available only in photo mode);
full-time AF (AF-F; available only in movie
mode); predictive focus tracking
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus points (single-point 209
AF, photo mode, DX image
area)
AF-area mode
Pinpoint, single-point, and dynamic-area AF
(pinpoint and dynamic-area AF available in
photo mode only); wide-area AF (S); wide-area
AF (L); auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A (L) button
Flash
Built-in flash
Charging time
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Manual pop-up flash raised via flash pop-up
control
Guide Number: Approx. 7/22, 7/22 with manual
flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Approx. 3 s
TTL: i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash is
used with matrix, center-weighted, and
highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL
fill-flash with spot metering
Fill flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow
sync + red-eye, rear-curtain sync, auto, auto +
red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow
sync + red-eye, flash off
–3 – +1 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and
1/2 EV) available in P, S, A, M, and h modes
Technical Notes 449
Flash
Flash-ready indicator
Accessory shoe
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
White balance
White balance
Bracketing
Bracketing types
Movie
Metering system
Metering mode
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
450 Technical Notes
Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit
is fully charged; flashes as underexposure
warning after flash is fired at full output
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
i-TTL flash control, optical Advanced Wireless
Lighting, FV lock, Color Information
Communication, Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct
sunlight, cloudy, shade, incandescent,
fluorescent (7 types), flash, choose color
temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset manual
(up to 6 values can be stored), all except choose
color temperature with fine-tuning
Exposure, white balance, and ADL
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
• 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p,
24p
• 1920 × 1080; 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
• 1920×1080 (slow-motion); 30p ×4, 25p ×4,
24p ×5
Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p,
25p, and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97,
25, and 23.976 fps respectively; quality
selection available except at sizes of
3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and
1920 × 1080 slow-motion, in which case quality
is fixed at m (high)
Movie
File format
Video compression
Audio recording format
Audio recording device
MOV, MP4
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Linear PCM, AAC
Built-in stereo or external microphone with
attenuator option; sensitivity adjustable
Exposure compensation –3 – +3 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and
1/2 EV) available in P, S, A, M, h, and q modes
ISO sensitivity
• M: Manual selection (ISO 100 to 25600; choose
(Recommended Exposure from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV); auto ISO
Index)
sensitivity control (ISO 100 to 25600) available
with selectable upper limit
• P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to
25600) with selectable upper limit
• b, h, q (excluding 4): Auto ISO sensitivity
control (ISO 100 to 25600)
• 4: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to Hi 4)
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Same as photo settings,
Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Other options
Time-lapse movies, electronic vibration
reduction
Playback
Playback
Interface
USB
HDMI output
Audio input
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom
cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie
slide shows, histogram display, highlights,
photo information, location data display, auto
image rotation, and picture rating
Hi-Speed USB with Micro-B connector;
connection to built-in USB port is recommended
Type D HDMI connector
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in
power supported)
Technical Notes 451
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Range (line of sight)
452 Technical Notes
• Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, Oceania, and
the following European countries: Albania,
Armenia, Georgia, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, and
Tajikistan)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (other European
countries, Uzbekistan, U.S.A., Canada,
Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the
Americas)
• Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) (Africa, Asia,
Oceania, and the following European
countries: Albania, Armenia, Georgia,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, and Tajikistan)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5320 MHz (other European countries,
Uzbekistan)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5825 MHz (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5805 MHz (other countries in the Americas)
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
2.4 GHz band: 6.9 dBm
5 GHz band: 10.2 dBm
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
• Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.2
• Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
Bluetooth: 1.4 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: –0.1 dBm
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) without
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles
Power source
Battery
Charging AC adapter
One EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery
EH-73P charging AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
14
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
/ in. (ISO 1222)
Approx. 126.5 × 93.5 × 60 mm (5 × 3.7 × 2.4 in.)
Approx. 450 g (15.9 oz.) with battery and
memory card but without body cap;
approx. 395 g/14 oz. (camera body only)
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and illustrations in the manuals
are for expository purposes only.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Technical Notes 453
❚❚ MH-32 Battery Charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.21 A
DC 8.4 V/1.12 A (MAX)
Nikon EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Approx. 2 hours and 30 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 67 × 94 × 28 mm (2.7 × 3.8 × 1.2 in.),
excluding plug adapter
Approx. 99 g (3.5 oz), excluding plug adapter
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚ EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rated capacity
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.6 V/1120 mAh
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 34 × 50.5 × 18 mm (1.4 × 2.0 × 0.8 in.)
Approx. 53 g (1.9 oz), excluding terminal cover
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
454 Technical Notes
A Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other
data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage
devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such
data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to
another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or
format the device and then completely refill it with images containing
no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should
be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage
devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another
person, you should also use the Reset all settings option in the camera
setup menu to delete network settings and other personal information.
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
Technical Notes 455
Approved Memory Cards
The camera supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards, including SDHC and SDXC cards compliant
with UHS-I. Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better
are recommended for movie recording and playback; using
slower cards may result in recording or playback being
interrupted. When choosing cards for use in card readers, be
sure they are compatible with the device. Contact the
manufacturer for information on features, operation, and
limitations on use.
456 Technical Notes
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 32 GB SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP card
at different image quality and size settings when DX (24 × 16) is
selected for Choose image area (as of April 2019).
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW)
12-bit
File size 1
No. of images 1
Buffer capacity 1, 2
19.9 MB
846
35
24.7 MB
743
30
—
14-bit
Large
9.2 MB
2100
71
Medium
6.3 MB
3400
100
Small
3.5 MB
6200
100
Large
5.5 MB
4100
100
Normal
Medium
3.3 MB
6600
100
Small
1.8 MB
11,800
100
Large
2.3 MB
8000
100
Basic
Medium
1.6 MB
12,600
100
Small
1.0 MB
21,600
100
1 All figures are approximate. File size, and with it the buffer capacity and number of images that
can be recorded, varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop if
auto distortion control is on.
Fine
JPEG
Technical Notes 457
Battery Endurance
The approximate length of footage or number of shots that can be
recorded with a fully-charged EN-EL25 battery varies with the monitor
mode. 1 The figures for photographs 2 are as follows:
• Viewfinder only: 280 shots
• Monitor only: 320 shots
The figures for movies 3 are:
• Viewfinder only: 75 minutes
• Monitor only: 75 minutes
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
• Using the camera with optional accessories connected
• Repeatedly zooming in and out
• Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL25
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
1 Endurance varies with the condition of the battery, the temperature, the interval between
shots, and the length of time menus are displayed.
2 CIPA standard. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–
6.3 VR lens under the following test conditions: one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and a NIKKOR Z DX
16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products
Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length; recording
may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
458 Technical Notes
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens kit. Note that lens kits
may not be available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚ Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1
2
8
3
4
5
6
7
9
Note: The rear cap included with the lens that
comes with the lens kit may differ from that
shown, in which case it can be removed
without performing Step q.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 459
Lens hoods block stray light that would
otherwise cause flare or ghosting. They also
serve to protect the lens.
Rotate to zoom in or out. Be sure to extend the
Zoom ring
lens before use.
Focal length scale
Determine the approximate focal length when
zooming the lens in or out.
Focal length mark
Autofocus mode selected:
In autofocus mode, rotate the ring to adjust a
setting such as Focus (M/A) or Aperture
assigned using the camera. For more
information, see the description of Custom
Control ring
control assignment/Custom controls
(shooting) in the camera manual.
Manual focus mode selected:
Rotate the ring to focus.
Lens mounting mark Use when mounting the lens on the camera.
CPU contacts
Used to transfer data to and from the camera.
Front lens cap
—
Rear lens cap
—
1 Lens hood*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
* Available separately.
460 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Attachment and Removal
Attaching the Lens
1 Turn the camera off, remove the body cap, and detach the
rear lens cap.
2 Position the lens on the camera body, keeping the
mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting
mark on the camera body, and then rotate the lens
counterclockwise until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lens
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Press and hold the lens release button while turning the
lens clockwise.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 461
❚❚ Before Use
The lens is retractable and must be extended before use. Rotate
the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended
position. Pictures can only be taken when the focal length mark
points to positions between 16 and 50 on the focal length scale.
Pictures can be taken at
these focal lengths
To retract the lens, rotate the zoom ring in the opposite
direction, stopping when you reach the (I) position on the focal
length scale.
If the camera is turned on with the lens retracted, a warning will
be displayed. Extend the lens before use.
462 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Attaching and Removing Optional Lens Hoods
Lens hoods (available separately) screw
directly into the threads in front of the
lens. Do not touch the glass surface of the
lens or use excessive force.
To remove the hood, unscrew it from the
lens.
❚❚ Using Built-in Flash Units
• Shadows will be visible in photos where the light from the
built-in flash is obscured by the lens or lens hood. Remove the
lens hood before shooting. Note, however, that even if the
hood is removed, shadows may still be visible at some focal
lengths and subject distances.
• The focal lengths at which built-in flash units can be used vary
with the camera; see the camera manual for details. The flash
may be unable to light the entire subject at focal lengths
shorter than those specified.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 463
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lens’s on-board vibration reduction can be enabled or
disabled using camera controls; see the camera manual for
details. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera
shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.5 stops slower than
would otherwise be the case and increasing the range of shutter
speeds available.
Note: The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according
to Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards.
DX-format lenses are measured using a DX-format camera with
on-camera VR set to Normal. Zoom lenses are measured at
maximum zoom.
464 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ When the Lens Is Attached
• The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and
then on again after focusing. If you have focused on a preselected location while waiting for your subject to appear, we
recommend that you do not turn the camera off until the
picture is taken.
• Mounting this lens on an FX-format camera:
- selects the DX image area, reducing the available focus points
and number of pixels recorded, and
- disables the Image Dust Off ref photo option in the setup
menu.
• Movies shot with the lens mounted on a Z 6 and 1920 × 1080
120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected
for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu will be
recorded at the following frame sizes and rates:
- 1920 × 1080; 120p
V 1920 × 1080; 60p
- 1920 × 1080; 100p
V 1920 × 1080; 50p
- 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 30p
- 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 25p
- 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 24p
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 465
Precautions for Use
• Do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the lens
hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Due to the design of the vibration reduction system, the lens
may rattle when shaken. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• Replace the front and rear lens caps when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the interior of the lens, store it out of direct sunlight.
• Do not leave the lens in humid locations or in locations in
which it may be exposed to moisture. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Do not leave the lens next to open flames or in other extremely
hot locations. Extreme heat could damage or warp exterior
parts made from reinforced plastic.
• Rapid changes in temperature may cause damaging
condensation inside and outside the lens. Before taking the
lens from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa, place it in
a bag or plastic case to slow the change in temperature.
• We recommend that you place the lens in a case (available
separately) to protect it from scratches during transport.
466 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lens Care
• Removing dust is normally sufficient to clean the glass surfaces
of the lens.
• Smudges, fingerprints, and other oily stains can be removed
from the lens surface using a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens
cleaning tissue lightly dampened with a small amount of
ethanol or lens cleaner. Wipe gently from the center outwards
in a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch
the lens with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to
clean the lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters (available separately) and the like can
be used to protect the front lens element.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a
cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in
direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
Accessories
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• LC-46B 46 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap (a different cap may be supplied with lens
kits)
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
• CL-C4 Lens Case
• HN-40 Screw-on Lens Hood
• 46 mm screw-on filters
D Filters
• Use only one filter at a time.
• Remove the lens hood before attaching filters.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 467
Specifications
Mount
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Focusing system
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
(measured from focal
plane)
Maximum reproduction
ratio
Diaphragm blades
Aperture range
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
Weight
Nikon Z mount
16 – 50 mm
f/3.5 – 6.3
9 elements in 7 groups (including 1 ED element
and 4 aspherical elements)
83°–31° 30' (DX image area)
Graduated in millimeters (16, 24, 35, 50)
Internal focusing system
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
• 16 mm zoom position: 0.25 m (0.82 ft)
• 24 mm zoom position: 0.2 m (0.66 ft)
• 35 mm zoom position: 0.23 m (0.76 ft)
• 50 mm zoom position: 0.3 m (0.99 ft)
0.2×
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
• 16 mm zoom position: f/3.5 – 22
• 50 mm zoom position: f/6.3 – 40
46 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 70 mm/2.8 in. maximum diameter ×
32 mm/1.3 in.
(distance from camera lens mount flange when
lens is retracted)
Approx. 135 g (4.8 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product
at any time and without prior notice.
468 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR lens kit. Note that lens kits
may not be available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚ Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1
2
3
11
4
5
6
7 8
9
10
12
Note: The rear cap included with the lens that
comes with the lens kit may differ from that
shown, in which case it can be removed
without performing Step q.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 469
1 Lens hood*
Lens hoods block stray light that would
otherwise cause flare or ghosting. They also
serve to protect the lens.
2 Lens hood lock mark
Lens hood alignment
3
mark
Use when attaching the lens hood.
Lens hood mounting
4
mark
Rotate to zoom in or out. Be sure to extend the
5 Zoom ring
lens before use.
6 Focal length scale
Determine the approximate focal length when
zooming the lens in or out.
7 Focal length mark
Autofocus mode selected:
In autofocus mode, rotate the ring to adjust a
setting such as Focus (M/A) or Aperture
assigned using the camera. For more
information, see the description of Custom
8 Control ring
control assignment/Custom controls
(shooting) in the camera manual.
Manual focus mode selected:
Rotate the ring to focus.
9 Lens mounting mark Use when mounting the lens on the camera.
10 CPU contacts
Used to transfer data to and from the camera.
11 Front lens cap
—
12 Rear lens cap
—
* Available separately.
470 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Attachment and Removal
Attaching the Lens
1 Turn the camera off, remove the body cap, and detach the
rear lens cap.
2 Position the lens on the camera body, keeping the
mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting
mark on the camera body, and then rotate the lens
counterclockwise until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lens
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Press and hold the lens release button while turning the
lens clockwise.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 471
❚❚ Before Use
The lens is retractable and must be extended before use. Rotate
the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended
position. Pictures can only be taken when the focal length mark
points to positions between 50 and 250 on the focal length
scale.
Pictures can be taken at
these focal lengths
To retract the lens, rotate the zoom ring in the opposite
direction, stopping when you reach the (I) position on the focal
length scale.
If the camera is turned on with the lens retracted, a warning will
be displayed. Extend the lens before use.
472 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Attaching and Removing Optional Lens Hoods
Align the lens hood mounting mark with the lens hood
alignment mark (q) and then rotate the hood (w) until the
mounting mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (e).
To remove the hood, reverse the above steps.
Lens hood alignment mark
Lens hood mounting mark
Lens hood lock mark
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the lens
hood alignment mark (I) and avoid gripping the front of the
hood too tightly. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the
lens when not in use.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 473
❚❚ Using Built-in Flash Units
Shadows will be visible in photos where the light from the builtin flash is obscured by the lens or lens hood. Remove the lens
hood before shooting. Note, however, that even if the hood is
removed, shadows may still be visible at some focal lengths and
subject distances.
Shadow
Shadow
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lens’s on-board vibration reduction can be enabled or
disabled using camera controls; see the camera manual for
details. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera
shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 5.0 stops slower than
would otherwise be the case and increasing the range of shutter
speeds available.
Note: The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according
to Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards.
DX-format lenses are measured using a DX-format camera with
on-camera VR set to Normal. Zoom lenses are measured at
maximum zoom.
474 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ When the Lens Is Attached
• The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and
then on again after focusing. If you have focused on a preselected location while waiting for your subject to appear, we
recommend that you do not turn the camera off until the
picture is taken.
• Mounting this lens on an FX-format camera:
- selects the DX image area, reducing the available focus points
and number of pixels recorded, and
- disables the Image Dust Off ref photo option in the setup
menu.
• Movies shot with the lens mounted on a Z 6 and 1920 × 1080
120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected
for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu will be
recorded at the following frame sizes and rates:
- 1920 × 1080; 120p
V 1920 × 1080; 60p
- 1920 × 1080; 100p
V 1920 × 1080; 50p
- 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 30p
- 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 25p
- 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 24p
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 475
Precautions for Use
• Do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the lens
hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Due to the design of the vibration reduction system, the lens
may rattle when shaken. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• Replace the front and rear lens caps when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the interior of the lens, store it out of direct sunlight.
• Do not leave the lens in humid locations or in locations in
which it may be exposed to moisture. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Do not leave the lens next to open flames or in other extremely
hot locations. Extreme heat could damage or warp exterior
parts made from reinforced plastic.
• Rapid changes in temperature may cause damaging
condensation inside and outside the lens. Before taking the
lens from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa, place it in
a bag or plastic case to slow the change in temperature.
• We recommend that you place the lens in a case (available
separately) to protect it from scratches during transport.
476 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lens Care
• Removing dust is normally sufficient to clean the glass surfaces
of the lens.
• Smudges, fingerprints, and other oily stains can be removed
from the lens surface using a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens
cleaning tissue lightly dampened with a small amount of
ethanol or lens cleaner. Wipe gently from the center outwards
in a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch
the lens with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to
clean the lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters (available separately) and the like can
be used to protect the front lens element.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a
cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in
direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
Accessories
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• LC-62B 62 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap (a different cap may be supplied with lens
kits)
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
• CL-C1 Lens Case
• HB-90A Bayonet Hood
• 62 mm screw-on filters
D Filters
• Use only one filter at a time.
• Remove the lens hood before attaching filters or rotating circular
polarizing filters.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 477
Specifications
Mount
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Focusing system
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
(measured from focal
plane)
Maximum reproduction
ratio
Diaphragm blades
Aperture range
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
Weight
Nikon Z mount
50 – 250 mm
f/4.5 – 6.3
16 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED
element)
31° 30’–6° 30’ (DX image area)
Graduated in millimeters (50, 70, 100, 135, 200,
250)
Internal focusing system
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
• 50 mm zoom position: 0.5 m (1.64 ft)
• 70 mm zoom position: 0.52 m (1.71 ft)
• 100 mm zoom position: 0.58 m (1.91 ft)
• 135 mm zoom position: 0.65 m (2.14 ft)
• 200 mm zoom position: 0.83 m (2.73 ft)
• 250 mm zoom position: 1.0 m (3.29 ft)
0.23×
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
• 50 mm zoom position: f/4.5 – 22
• 250 mm zoom position: f/6.3 – 32
62 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 74 mm/3 in. maximum diameter ×
110 mm/4.4 in.
(distance from camera lens mount flange when
lens is retracted)
Approx. 405 g (14.3 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product
at any time and without prior notice.
478 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash
and AF-Assist Illuminator
The lenses listed in this section may block the built-in flash or
AF-assist illuminator under some conditions.
AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1.0–3.0 m (3 ft
4 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a
focal length of 16–300 mm. Some lenses may block the
illuminator at certain focus distances.
• Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator.
• The following lenses interfere with AF-assist illumination:
Lenses that prevent the use of AF-assist illumination for autofocus
NIKKOR Z 14–30mm f/4 S
Lenses that limit the range at which AF-assist illumination can be used for
autofocus
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/2.8 S
AF-assist illumination cannot be
used for autofocus at distances
under 2.5 m (8 ft 3 in.)
Technical Notes 479
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of
16–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to
entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to
shadows cast by the lens.
• Peripheral illumination may drop at focal lengths under
16 mm.
• The NIKKOR Z 14–30mm f/4 S casts shadows in photos taken
with the built-in flash at all focal lengths. Other lenses that
restrict use of the built-in flash are as follows:
Lens
Minimum shadow-free focal length/
minimum shadow-free focus distance
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
16 mm/0.6 m (2 ft)
24–50 mm/No vignetting
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/2.8 S
70 mm/1 m (3 ft 4 in.)
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR
50 mm/1 m (3 ft 4 in.)
70 mm/0.8 m (2 ft 8 in.)
100–250 mm/No vignetting
D Red-Eye Reduction
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may
interfere with red-eye reduction.
A More on the Built-in Flash
• The built-in flash has a minimum range of about 0.6 m (2 ft).
• Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Note: Shadows appear in photographs when the lens blocks the light
from the flash.
Shadow
480 Technical Notes
Shadow
Trademarks and Licenses
A Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license. Windows
is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries. Mac, macOS, OS X, Apple®,
App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, and iPod touch® are
trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google
LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work created and
shared by Google and used according to terms described in the Creative
Commons 3.0 Attribution License. PictBridge is a trademark of the
Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). The SD, SDHC, and
SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and
High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Nikon Corporation is under license.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the
badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
affect wireless performance.
Technical Notes 481
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project
(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights
reserved.
A AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
https://www.mpegla.com
482 Technical Notes
A Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database)
This software incorporates Unicode® Character Database open-source
code. The license for this open-source code is given below.
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2019 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation
(the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that either
(a) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the
Data Files or Software, or
(b) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED
IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE
OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
Technical Notes 483
Index
Symbols
b (Auto mode) .............................40, 44
P (Programmed auto) .................71, 72
S (Shutter-priority auto) .............71, 72
A (Aperture-priority auto)..........71, 73
M (Manual) ......................................71, 74
U1/U2..................................................71, 78
h (Scene).....................................71, 80
k (Portrait) ............................................81
l (Landscape)......................................81
p (Child).................................................81
m (Sports)...............................................82
n (Close up)..........................................82
o (Night portrait)................................82
r (Night landscape)...........................83
s (Party/indoor)..................................83
t (Beach/snow)...................................83
d (Sunset)..............................................84
e (Dusk/dawn) ....................................84
f (Pet portrait) ....................................84
g (Candlelight)......................................85
j (Blossom)...........................................85
z (Autumn colors)..............................85
0 (Food) ..................................................86
q (Special effects)....................71, 87
4 (Night vision) ...................................88
V (Super vivid) .....................................88
T (Pop) ..................................................88
U (Photo illustration)..................89, 92
5 (Toy camera effect) .................89, 92
6 (Miniature effect) ....................90, 93
7 (Selective color) .......................90, 94
1 (Silhouette).......................................91
2 (High key)..........................................91
3 (Low key)...........................................91
U (Single frame) ...................... 131, 258
V (Continuous L) .......................... 131
484 Technical Notes
W (Continuous H) ..........................131
X (Continuous H (extended)) ..131
E (Self-timer) ........................... 131, 134
L (Silent photography).................... 67
x (Electronic front-curtain shutter)...
275
P (Mechanical shutter)...................275
3 (Pinpoint AF) .................................. 54
d (Single-point AF).......................... 54
e (Dynamic-area AF)....................... 55
f (Wide-area AF (S)) ....................... 55
g (Wide-area AF (L))........................ 55
h (Auto-area AF)............................... 55
L (Matrix)............................................127
M (Center-weighted).......................127
N (Spot) ...............................................127
t (Highlight-weighted)................127
J (Red-eye reduction) ...... 104, 125
L (Slow sync)....................... 104, 125
M (Rear-curtain sync) ........ 104, 125
E (Exposure compensation)........... 98
K button......................................48, 145
O button........................................50, 164
G button ........................................... 21
S button..................................... 96, 97
A (L) button.....................20, 70, 100
W button .........................20, 23, 145
X button ............................. 20, 145, 162
i button ........................................24, 110
J button................................................ 21
I (In-focus indicator)........................ 61
c (Flash-ready indicator)................429
t icon..................................................... 39
Numerics
1 : 1 (16 × 16) ......................................124
16 : 9 (24 × 14)....................................124
A
Automatic display switch ...................8
Accessories ......................................... 431
Access-point mode.................348, 349
Active D-Lighting ............................. 129
ADL bracketing ................................. 221
AE bracketing .................................... 214
AE lock.........................................100, 101
AF .................................................... 51, 265
AF activation ...................................... 266
AF fine-tune........................................ 307
AF lock.........................................100, 101
AF speed.............................................. 299
AF tracking sensitivity .................... 299
AF-area mode .......................................54
AF-assist........................................ 42, 268
AF-C ............................................................52
AF-C priority selection.................... 265
AF-F .................................................. 52, 144
AF-S ............................................................52
After delete......................................... 180
Airplane mode................................... 313
Android................................................ 373
Aperture .................................................73
Aperture-priority auto.......................73
Apply settings to live view............ 277
Attaching the lens...............................36
Attenuator .......................................... 260
Authentication/encryption........... 315
Auto (Set Picture Control) ............. 112
Auto (White balance) ............... 64, 116
Auto bracketing................................ 213
Auto c ISO sensitivity control ...... 279
Auto distortion control .........207, 257
Auto FP high-speed sync............... 278
Auto ISO sensitivity control ... 97, 192
Auto send...................................318, 361
Auto-area AF .........................................55
Auto-area AF face/eye detection 265
Autoexposure lock..................100, 101
Autofocus..................................... 51, 265
B
Battery.............................................. 31, 32
Battery charger ...........................31, 454
Battery endurance............................458
Battery level .......................................... 34
Beep options ......................................312
Bluetooth.............................................373
Body cap .......................................36, 431
Bracketing order................................280
Built-in flash .................................29, 103
Bulb.......................................................... 76
C
Camera Control Pro 2 ......................436
Capture NX-D .................... 69, 388, 436
Center-weighted..................... 127, 271
Charge lamp ............................. 433, 434
Charging AC adapter....431, 433, 444
Charging the battery ......................... 31
Choose color temp. (White balance)
65, 118, 196
Choose image area...........................189
Choose start/end point ..................158
CL mode shooting speed...............274
Clock........................................................ 39
Clock battery ........................................ 39
Cloudy (White balance) ...........64, 116
Color space..........................................205
Color temperature........... 65, 118, 196
Command dial .............................. 9, 290
Compatible lenses.................. 416, 445
Conformity marking ........................320
Connect to computers....................347
Connect to PC .......................... 316, 387
Connect to smart device................314
Connect to smart devices ..............365
Continuous..........................................258
Continuous H .....................................131
Continuous H (extended) ..............131
Technical Notes 485
Continuous L ..................................... 131
Continuous release mode.... 131, 258
Control ring........................61, 460, 470
Copyright information ................... 311
CPU contacts............................. 460, 470
Creative Lighting System (CLS)... 426
Creative Picture Control ................ 112
Crop ...................................................... 155
Custom control assignment. 27, 282,
294
Custom controls ............................... 294
Custom controls (playback) ......... 288
Custom controls (shooting) ......... 282
Custom Picture Control201, 202, 256
Custom Settings ...................... 172, 261
Customize command dials ........... 290
Customize i menu ........ 25, 281, 293
D
Date and time.................................... 303
Date format ........................................ 303
Daylight saving time....................... 303
DCF........................................................ 455
Default settings ....................... 167, 405
Delete................................... 50, 164, 179
Delete all images.............................. 165
Delete current image............... 50, 164
Delete selected images.................. 165
Deselecting pictures ....................... 361
Diffraction compensation.... 207, 257
Diopter adjustment control .............. 7
Direct connection to PC................. 349
Direct sunlight (White balance) ....64,
116
Disconnecting and reconnecting ......
364
DISP button.............................................18
Distortion control............................. 334
D-Lighting........................................... 332
Download center ................................. iv
DX .......................................................... 124
486 Technical Notes
Dynamic-area AF .......................55, 136
E
Easy connect.......................................354
Edit movie ................................. 158, 339
Electronic VR............................. 143, 259
Energy saving.....................................321
Error messages ........................ 412, 414
Errors (Wireless connections).......386
Establish Wi-Fi connection............315
EV steps for exposure cntrl............270
Exif..........................................................455
Exposure .......................................98, 270
Exposure comp. for flash ...............279
Exposure compensation 98, 270, 279
Exposure data ....................................148
Exposure delay mode .....................274
Exposure indicator ............................. 75
Exposure lock........................... 100, 101
Exposures remaining......................... 34
Extensions ...........................................189
External microphone............. 141, 432
Eye sensor.................................................7
Eye-detection AF................................. 57
F
Face-detection AF .............................. 57
File information.................................148
File naming ............................... 189, 254
File number sequence ....................276
Filter effects ........................................115
Fine-tune optimal exposure .........271
Fine-tuning white balance .. 117, 194
Firmware version ..............................322
Flash ...................................125, 397, 426
Flash (White balance)...............65, 116
Flash compensation .............. 107, 212
Flash control............................. 209, 400
Flash mode................................ 104, 125
Flash off...................................... 105, 125
Flash pop-up control................29, 103
Flash ready indicator....................... 429
Flash shutter speed ......................... 279
Flash sync speed............................... 278
Flat (Set Picture Control)................ 112
Flexible program .................................72
Flick ..........................................................14
Flicker reduction......................208, 257
Fluorescent (White balance) . 64, 116
Fn1 button ..............................................27
Fn2 button ..............................................27
Focal length...............................462, 472
Focal length scale....................462, 472
Focal plane mark .................................62
Focus indicator.....................................61
Focus lock ..................................100, 101
Focus mode...........................................51
Format memory card ...................... 302
Frame rate..................................132, 139
Frame size/frame rate............139, 254
Framing grid display ....................... 277
Frequency response........................ 260
Full-frame playback........... 14, 48, 145
Function buttons.................................27
FV lock .........................................108, 430
H
HDMI.................................. 313, 395, 455
HDMI connector ............................... 395
HDMI recorders................................. 396
Help..........................................................23
Hi ...............................................................96
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 230
High ISO NR ...............................206, 256
Highlight display .............................. 300
Highlights............................62, 127, 149
Highlight-weighted......................... 127
Histogram ..................................149, 150
I
Image area .......................................... 189
Image comment ............................... 310
Image Dust Off ref photo...............308
Image overlay.....................................336
Image quality ........................... 122, 190
Image review............................ 146, 180
Image sensor ................................. 2, 441
Image size.................................. 124, 190
Incandescent (White balance)....... 64,
116
In-focus indicator................................ 61
Information display......... 18, 306, 420
Infrastructure mode............... 348, 353
Interval timer shooting...................235
iOS ..........................................................379
IP address................................... 317, 357
ISO sensitivity.................... 96, 192, 255
i-TTL ....................................399, 400, 426
J
JPEG .......................................................122
L
L (large) .................................................124
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..112
Language.............................................302
Lens....................................... 36, 459, 469
Lens mount ........................................... 36
Lens mounting mark ......................... 36
Limit selectable image area ..........275
Location data ........................... 153, 313
Location data display ......................313
Long exposure NR ............................206
Low-light AF .......................................267
M
M (medium) .........................................124
MAC address.......................................318
Main command dial..............................9
Manage Picture Control ....... 202, 256
Manual...........................................74, 400
Manual focus ................................. 52, 61
Manual focus ring in AF mode.....269
Technical Notes 487
Matrix metering................................ 127
Max. continuous release................ 274
Maximum aperture.......................... 429
Maximum sensitivity................ 97, 192
Memory buffer .................................. 133
Memory card...................... 32, 456, 457
Memory card capacity.................... 457
Menu guide........................................ 167
Metering.............................................. 127
MF ..............................................................52
Microphone...............................141, 432
Microphone sensitivity ......... 141, 259
Miniature effect ...................................93
Minimum shutter speed................ 192
Mired .................................................... 196
Mode dial .......................................... 9, 71
Monitor .....................................5, 12, 417
Monitor brightness.......................... 303
Monitor mode button ......................... 8
Monitor pre-flash ............................. 109
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...
112
Movie file type................................... 254
Movie quality............................ 139, 254
Movie shooting menu...........171, 253
Movie-record button .........................45
Movies.................................... 44, 48, 137
Multi selector........................................21
Multiple exposure............................ 223
My Menu ............................................. 341
N
Natural light auto (White balance) ....
64, 116
NEF (RAW).................................. 122, 191
NEF (RAW) processing.................... 326
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 191
Network settings............317, 349, 353
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 112
Number of focus points................. 266
Number of shots............................... 458
488 Technical Notes
O
OK button............................................288
Optical AWL .............................. 402, 404
Optical VR .........................135, 212, 259
Overview data....................................154
P
Pairing...................................................385
Peaking highlights ...........................277
Perspective control ..........................335
Photo Illustration ................................ 92
Photo information............................147
Photo shooting menu........... 168, 184
Photo/movie selector................. 40, 44
PictBridge .................................. 392, 455
Picture Controls..............112, 200, 256
PIN-entry WPS....................................354
Pinpoint AF ..................................54, 136
Playback.................................14, 48, 145
Playback display options ...............179
Playback folder ..................................179
Playback menu ........................ 167, 178
Playback zoom.................. 15, 150, 162
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........112
Power off delay..................................273
Preset manual (White balance)..... 65,
119, 198
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 43
Press the shutter-release button
halfway ................................................. 42
Problems and solutions..................406
Product serial number .........................4
Programmed auto.............................. 72
Protecting photographs .................. 70
Push-button WPS .............................354
Q
Quick crop ...........................................155
Quick retouch ....................................332
Quick sharp......................................... 115
R
Rating ................................................... 183
Rear-curtain sync.....................104, 125
Recent settings.........................341, 345
Rechargeable Li-ion battery. 31, 431,
454
Red-eye correction .......................... 333
Red-eye reduction ..................104, 125
Release button to use dial............. 292
Release mode .................................... 131
Remote flash photography..397, 401
Remote photography..................... 365
Removing the lens from the camera
37
Reset .........................185, 254, 264, 322
Reset all settings............................... 322
Reset custom settings .................... 264
Reset movie shooting menu........ 254
Reset photo shooting menu ........ 185
Reset user settings.................... 79, 302
Resize.................................................... 330
Restoring default settings............. 405
Retouch menu................................... 323
Reverse indicators............................ 292
RGB ..................................... 149, 189, 205
Rotate tall...................................146, 181
S
S (small) ................................................ 124
Same as photo settings.................. 137
Save current frame .......................... 161
Save user settings ..................... 78, 302
Scene mode ..........................................80
Search for Wi-Fi network ............... 354
Select date .................................165, 166
Select to send to smart device .... 157
Select to send/deselect.................. 157
Selecting pictures for upload....... 360
Selective color ......................................94
Self-portrait mode .....................13, 313
Self-timer ..........................131, 134, 272
Send while off ....................................315
Sensitivity .............................................. 96
Set Picture Control ........112, 200, 256
Setup menu .............................. 176, 301
Shade (White balance)....................116
Shooting data ....................................151
Shutter speed................................ 72, 74
Shutter type........................................275
Shutter-priority auto.......................... 72
Shutter-release button .............. 42, 43
Shutter-release button AE-L .........272
Side-by-side comparison ...............339
Silent photography...................67, 252
Single frame.............................. 131, 258
Single-point AF................. 54, 136, 144
Size............................................... 124, 190
Slide show ...........................................182
Slot empty release lock...................321
Slow sync ................................... 104, 125
Slow-motion movies........................140
Smart device....................128, 314, 365
SnapBridge...................................39, 365
Special effects mode ......................... 87
Specifications .....................................445
Spot........................................................127
SSID.....................................315, 349, 354
Standard (Set Picture Control) .....112
Standard i-TTL fill-flash ...................426
Standby timer .............................43, 273
Storage folder ....................................185
Straighten............................................333
Sub-command dial................................9
Subject tracking .................................. 58
T
Text entry......................................16, 186
Thumbnail ....................................15, 146
Tilting monitor........................................3
Time......................................................... 76
Technical Notes 489
Time zone ........................................... 303
Time zone and date......................... 303
Time-lapse movie............................. 245
Touch controls .................... 12, 59, 312
Touch screen .................................12, 59
Touch shutter ................................12, 59
Trademark Information.................. 481
Trim ....................................................... 329
Trim movie.......................................... 339
Trimming movies .................... 158, 339
Tripod......................................................76
Troubleshooting............................... 405
U
USB ........................................................ 392
User settings ............................... 78, 302
Using an on-camera flash ............. 398
V
View all in continuous mode ....... 277
Viewfinder ......................................7, 423
Viewfinder brightness .................... 304
Viewfinder color balance .............. 305
Viewfinder eyepiece ...................7, 432
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............... 432
Viewfinder focus.................................... 7
ViewNX-i.............................. 69, 388, 436
Vignette control ...................... 207, 257
Virtual horizon...............................18, 19
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 112
Volume.......................................... 49, 312
W
WB (White balance).................. 63, 116
WB bracketing................................... 218
White balance ............................ 63, 116
Wide-area AF ..................... 55, 136, 144
Wi-Fi .............................................128, 347
Wi-Fi connection .............................. 316
Wi-Fi mode ......................................... 367
Wind noise reduction ..................... 260
490 Technical Notes
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options 319
Wireless Transmitter Utility...........347
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB9K02(11)
6MOA3011-02
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement